# Online Ordering


# Inventory

Manage your entire menu and the availability of your products.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Menu display</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/2HBpnBRPMPeu0B2K7BVM">/pages/2HBpnBRPMPeu0B2K7BVM</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Categories</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/5IdVaUj7RVzSTowOrBwt">/pages/5IdVaUj7RVzSTowOrBwt</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Products</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/XzfIK04IwsXuhxgUIWUO">/pages/XzfIK04IwsXuhxgUIWUO</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Product variants</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/6wm8WrNkLpbk9DDR3xAe">/pages/6wm8WrNkLpbk9DDR3xAe</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Modifiers</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/0894fY8NAq9ry1gyyL7g">/pages/0894fY8NAq9ry1gyyL7g</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Modifiers groups</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/84VuQ62ObyQ28fzF9qVn">/pages/84VuQ62ObyQ28fzF9qVn</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Choice products</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/Z7xUDky45XILmsMwq0qQ">/pages/Z7xUDky45XILmsMwq0qQ</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Combos</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/qbTQDgP94gPGxITBmVML">/pages/qbTQDgP94gPGxITBmVML</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Choice groups</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/KRvtbrQr9j8iy8unZwrE">/pages/KRvtbrQr9j8iy8unZwrE</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Clone inventory</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/UGRMTdBokfsepBznWbxU">/pages/UGRMTdBokfsepBznWbxU</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Supplements</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/4ANBRgr1EDBGt3N4qr9o">/pages/4ANBRgr1EDBGt3N4qr9o</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Hierarchy and menu creation</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/bZ7ykZ4oHAyUI434Eyd1">/pages/bZ7ykZ4oHAyUI434Eyd1</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Menu display

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611150783920-IMG_Catogire-AN.png)

The menu display is a tool for changing the order and visibility of categories and products constituting a menu.

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/25kOmCSsZTQ>" %}

### Reach menu display

1. Click on the branch to which you want to apply changes.
2. In the inventory section of the navigation bar, go to ***Menu Display***.
3. Then click on the ***Online*** catalog. This catalog contains your online ordering menu.

### Change the menu display

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611150819562-VDO_Affichage-AN.mp4>" %}

1. Click on the desired category and, while keeping the mouse button pressed, drag the category to the desired location.
2. Open a category by clicking on it.
3. To make a product invisible, uncheck this product. Note that categories with no visible product will not be displayed on your online menu.
4. To move a product, click on the desired product and, while keeping the mouse button pressed, drag the product to the desired location in its category.
5. Click on ***Save*** when you're done with your changes.


# Categories

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611150929888-IMG_Catogire-AN.png)

A category is made up of products that are similar or correspond to a similar type. Categories are the first to be seen when the user arrives at the restaurant menu.

***Example:** Starters, Pasta, Grills, Desserts, Drinks, etc.*

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/-foXU_sF_vM>" %}

### Create a category

1. Click New ***Category*** .
2. Fill out the forms with the necessary information and add an image as needed (jpg or png, 600 x 400 pixels).
3. To add a French version, click ***Manage translations*** .
4. Click ***Save*** to return to the category management page.

### Display a category description

\
![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611153773885-IMG_Cat-Descript_AN.png)

Usually, categories are displayed with the number of products contained as well as the minimum price for a product. You can, however, add and display a description for one or more of your categories.

***Example:** All our dishes are served with fries and a choice of salad.*

1. On the category creation / modification page, enter the desired description in the ***Description*** field.
2. Click on ***Save***.
3. If you add and display a category description, the product numbers and minimum prices will no longer be displayed for all categories.
4. Note that only company administrators can enable the display of category descriptions

### Edit / Delete a category

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611583013770-IMG_Cat-Mod-AN.png)

1. Click the right edit button of a category to modify or delete a category.
2. Note that deleting a category will not remove the products in the deleted category; the products will end up without category and will not be visible on the ordering platform.
3. Click ***Save*** to return to the category management page.

### Assign a product to a category

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611151592822-VDO_Categories-AN.mp4>" %}

1. In the information page of a category, go to the ***Products*** section of the category.
2. Select the desired products and use the arrows in the center of the section to place or remove a product for the current category.
3. Click ***Save*** to return to the category management page.


# Products

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611155595289-IMG_Produits-AN.png)

A product is a dish or item offered by the restaurant, available when the user accesses a category. Each product can be assigned extras, sides, combos, etc. A product without a category will not be displayed in the menu.

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/IiGpY-IBsVc>" %}

### Go to products

1. Products are accessible in the ***Products*** tab in the ***Inventory*** section of a branch's navigation ***menu*** .
2. You can also access them by going through the ***Category*** tab in the same section of the menu and see products specific to the selected category.

### Create a product

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611234184912-IMG_Prod-Complet-AN.png)

1. Click ***New Product*** .
2. Fill out the forms with the necessary information and add an image as needed (jpg or png, 600 x 400 pixels).\
   **A. General Information -** Enter descriptive product information in this section (name, description, photo).\
   **B. Classification -** Classification is the category to which a product belongs. Note that if you do not assign a category to the product, the product will be hidden from users.\
   **C. Payment Information -** You can enter the price of the product according to the type of receipt (if required). It is also in this section that you can synchronize the product with your existing POS system and adjust the applicability of the product to certain functions and promotions in the ordering interface.\
   **D. Modifiers and Combo -** In this section you can select the Extras, Notes and Combo that will be applicable to the product. Select the desired item and click on the arrows to send it to the right section and activate it.\
   **E. Product Variants -** To offer your product in multiple available formats, you can create variations that will have all of their information, pricing, photos, and POS sync details. Enter the requested information in order to create a variant and select the extras, remarks and combos that apply to it.
3. To add a French version, click ***Manage translations*** .
4. Click on ***Save*** when you're done creating your product.

### Edit / Delete / Clone a product

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611156192290-IMG_Prod-Mod-AN.png)\
Click the right edit button of a product to modify, delete, or clone a product. Note that you can make a product inaccessible without having to delete it:

1. On the product management page, click on the desired product.
2. Check the ***Hide this product*** box in the ***Classification*** section.
3. Click on ***Save*** .


# Product variants

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611175244014-IMG_Variantes-AN.png)

A product can be offered in several formats: Starter / Meal, Quantities, etc. For each format, we can create a variant for the same product which will be available on the page of the selected product. A price and an image can be assigned to the variant. A variant must be selected by the user for the product to be added to the current order.

***Example:** Starter or Main course formats.*

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/oPrVkoNdGHU>" %}

### Creating a product variant

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611158204919-VDO_Variante-AN.mp4>" %}

1. On a product page, go to the Product ***variants*** section.
2. Click on ***Add a variant***.
3. Fill out the form with the necessary information, payment information and a representative photo or image of the variant (jpg or png, 200 x 200 pixels).
4. Add additional variations by clicking ***Add a variant*** again , if necessary.
5. Click ***Save*** once the variants have been created to save all the changes made to the product.

### Activate an extra or combo

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611584586341-IMG_Variantes-Mods-AN.png)

1. On a product page, go to the Product ***variants*** section.
2. Click on the desired variant.
3. In the section ***Modifiers and combo***, select the desired option and click on the arrow to send it in the right section. This will activate this option for the desired variant.
4. Click ***Save*** once the variants have been created to save all the changes made to the product.

### Edit / Delete a variant

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611585391751-IMG_Variantes-Del-AN.png)

1. To modify a variant, go to the ***Product variants*** section.
2. Select the variant you want to modify and edit the desired information.
3. To delete the variant, click the ***X*** button at the top right of the desired variant.
4. Click ***Save*** once the variants have been modified or deleted to save all the changes made to the product and return to the product management page.


# Modifiers

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611176301773-IMG_Extras-AN.png)

Modifierss are particular ingredients that can be selected when the user wants to add a product to their order. They usually consist of condiments, ingredients, etc.

***Example:** Extra Mayonnaise, Coffee with 2% milk, etc.*

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/O8IxQH4lz0A>" %}

### Reaching modifiers

1. Modifiers are accessible in the ***Selection and remarks*** tab in the ***Inventory Management*** section of a branch's navigation menu.
2. From the ***Modifiers*** page, you can access individual modifiers as well as groups of modifiers.

### Creating a modifier

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611244494378-VDO_Extra-AN.mp4>" %}

1. Click on ***Create new modifier***.
2. Fill in the necessary information and add a photo if desired (200 x 200 pixels).
3. If it's a paid extra, you can add a price as well as a POS sync ID.
4. Click on ***Save*** once the creation of the modifier is completed.

### Add a singular modifier to a product

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611255165633-VDO_Extra-Prod-AN.mp4>" %}

1. On the product management page, click on the desired product.
2. In the ***Modifiers and combos section***, choose ***Modifiers and remarks***.
3. Use the ***Modifiers and remarks bank*** to choose the desired modifier. Then click on the ***arrows*** to bring the selected modifiers to the product's modifiers bank. Use the search box to easily find the modifier you want.
4. If necessary, you can create a modifier directly on the product configuration page.
5. Click ***Save*** when modifiers are assigned and changes are complete.

### Modify / Delete a modifier

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611586737030-IMG_Extras-Mod-AN.png)

1. To modify or delete a modifier, click on the edit button to the right of the desired extra.
2. Click ***Edit*** or ***Delete*** .
3. Once the changes are completed, click on ***Save*** to return to the modifiers management page.


# Modifiers groups

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611239065956-IMG_Groupe-Extras-AN.png)

Modifiers groups are associations of different modifiers under the same group. They are used when you want to combine several modifiers of the same type at the same time for a particular product.

***Example:** Ketchup, Mustard and Mayonnaise in the Extra Sauces Group.*

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/awIwbGNjLM8>" %}

### Reaching modifiers groups

1. Modifiers groups are accessible in the ***Selection and remarks*** tab in the ***Inventory*** section of a branch's navigation menu.
2. From the ***Modifiers*** page, you can access individual modifiers as well as modifiers groups.

### Creating a modifiers group

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611240534343-VDO_Groupe-Extra-AN.mp4>" %}

1. Click ***New modifiers group*** .
2. Enter the internal name (name which will appear only in the iShopFood management interface) and the name for display (name which will appear on the command interfaces).
3. Add the desired modifiers by selecting them from the list on the left.
4. Use the arrows to add them to the list on the right, to the current group.
5. Click on ***Save*** when you are finished to finalize the creation of your modifiers group and return to the management page.

### Edit / Delete a modifiers group

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611587420700-IMG_Groupe-Extras-AN.png)

1. Click on the edit button to the right of the desired group.
2. Choose ***Edit*** or ***Delete*** .
3. Once the changes are completed, click ***Save*** to and return to the modifiers group management page.


# Choice products

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611241566550-IMG_Combo-AN.png)

Choice products are additional products or ingredients with which a product must be ordered. It can be a side dish (salad, fries, etc.), a type of cooking (rare, well done, etc.), a flavor (apples, oranges, etc.), a brand (Pepsi, Crush, 7Up, etc.), etc.

A prize can be assigned to a choice product. Unlike modifiers, a choice product must be selected by the user for the product to be added to the order.

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/luv2aEa5AHM>" %}

### Reaching choice products

1. The choice products and combos are accessible in the ***Selection and remarks*** tab in the ***Inventory*** section of a branch's navigation menu.
2. The ***Combos*** page also gives you access to combo products as well as combo groups.

### Create a choice product

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611257370640-VDO_Prod-Combo-AN.mp4>" %}

1. Click ***New combo item*** .
2. Enter the information needed to create the choice product, including name, price, POS ID, etc.
3. Add modifiers to the choice product in the ***Extras*** ***Groups*** section, if desired. Select the group and use the arrows to activate the groups of modifiers.
4. Assign a combo to your choice product in the Combos section assigned to that choice product.
5. Click on ***Save*** once the necessary information fields have been filled in to create your choice product.

### Associate a combo to a choice product

\
![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611588725641-IMG_Combo-Combo-AN.png)

You can assign one or more combos to a choice product. Thus, when a user chooses a choice product during an order, they will have access to the combos linked to this choice product.

***Example:*** The user selects fries to accompany his burger, and must then choose a sauce to accompany their fries.

1. Select the desired choice product in the ***Choice products*** management page.
2. In the ***Combos*** section, select the desired combo in the combo bank and move it to the selected combos using the arrows.
3. Click ***Save*** once your changes are complete to return to the choice product management page.

### Edit / Delete a choice product

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611589234971-IMG_Combo-Prod-Mod-AN.png)

1. Click on the edit button to the right of the desired choice product.
2. Click ***Edit*** to reach the choice product edit page.
3. Click ***Save*** once your changes are complete to return to the choice product management page.
4. To permanently delete the choice product, click on the edit button and then on ***Delete*** .
5. Note that you can hide a choice product without deleting it by not assigning it to any combo.


# Combos

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611176922397-IMG_Combo-AN.png)

Combos are made up of one or more choice products. A choice product must be selected by the user for a given combo when ordering a product.

***Example:** Combo Choice of side dish: Garlic bread, Cheese sticks, Croutons, Caesar salad.*

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/luv2aEa5AHM>" %}

### Reaching combo and choices products

1. The combos are accessible in the ***Combos or choices*** tab in the ***Inventory*** section of a branch's navigation menu.
2. The ***Combos*** page also gives you access to choices products as well as combo groups.

### Create a choice product

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611591965704-VDO_Prod-Combo-AN.mp4>" %}

1. Click ***New combo item***.
2. Enter the information needed to create the choice product, including name, price, POS ID, etc.
3. Add modifiers to the choice product in the ***Modifiers Groups*** section, if desired. Select the group and use the arrows to activate the groups of modifiers.
4. Assign a combo to your choice product in the ***Combos*** section assigned to that product.
5. Click on ***Save*** once the necessary information fields have been filled in to create your choice product.

### Create a combo

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611669216457-VDO_Combo-AN.mp4>" %}

1. Click on ***New combo*** .
2. Enter a name and choose whether the combo is optional or not and whether a default product is chosen automatically.
3. Add modifiers to the combo in the ***Modifiers Groups*** section, if desired. Select the group and use the arrows to activate the groups of modifiers.
4. Click on ***Save*** once the necessary information fields have been filled in to create your combo.

### Associate a combo with a Choice group

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611592558835-IMG_Combo-Group-AN.png)

***Choice groups*** are associations of several different combos, used to quickly associate these combos with a product or product type.

1. In the ***Choices groups*** management page, click on the desired combo group or create a new choice group, according to your needs.
2. Give your choice group a name and description.
3. Add a french version to your name and description by clicking ***Manage translations***.
4. Select the desired combos from the combo bank on the left. Use the search box as needed.
5. Use the arrows in the center to move the selected combos to the right to assign them to the current choice group.
6. Click on ***Save*** to finalize your modifications and return to the choice groups management page.

### Edit / Delete a combo

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611593230146-IMG_Combo-Del-AN.png)

1. Click on the edit button to the right of the desired combo.
2. Click on ***Edit*** to reach the combo modification page, then click on ***Save*** once your modifications have been completed to return to the combo management page.
3. To permanently delete the combo , click on the edit button and then on ***Delete*** .


# Choice groups

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611242389896-IMG_Groupe-Combo-AN.png)

Choice groups are associations of several different combos, used to quickly associate these combos with a product or product type.

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/luv2aEa5AHM>" %}

### Reach choice groups

1. The combo groups are accessible in the ***Selection and remarks*** tab in the ***Inventory*** section of the navigation menu of a branch.
2. The ***Choice groups*** page also gives you access to choice products as well as combos.

### Create a choice group

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611243294977-VDO_Groupe-Combo-AN.mp4>" %}

1. Click on ***New choice group***.
2. Enter the ***internal name*** (name which will appear only in the iShopFood management interface) and the name ***for display*** (name which will appear on the command interfaces).
3. Add the desired combos by selecting them from the list on the left.
4. Use the arrows to add them to the list on the right, to the current group.
5. Click on ***Save*** to return to the choice group management page.

### Associate a combo with a choice group

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611243327768-VDO_Groupe-Combo-AN.mp4>" %}

1. In the ***Choices groups*** management page, click on the desired combo group or create a new choice group, according to your needs.
2. Give your choice group a name and description.
3. Add a french version to your name and description by clicking ***Manage translations***.
4. Select the desired combos from the combo bank on the left. Use the search box as needed.
5. Use the arrows in the center to move the selected combos to the right to assign them to the current choice group.
6. Click on ***Save*** to finalize your modifications and return to the choice groups management page.

### Edit / Delete a combo group

\
![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611607901472-IMG_Groupe-Comb-DEL-AN.png)

1. Click on the edit button to the right of the desired choice group.
2. Click ***Edit*** to reach the combo group edit page.
3. Click on ***Save*** once your changes are complete to return to the choice groups management page.
4. To permanently delete the choice group, click on the edit button and then on ***Delete*** .


# Clone inventory

***Clone inventory*** allows you to copy the entire inventory from one branch to another within the same company.

### Clone an inventory

1. To access the ***Clone inventory*** page, go to the branch management page for the desired company and click ***Clone Inventory*** in the ***Admin*** tab of the navigation bar.
2. In the ***To copy to*** field, select the branch office that will receive the copied inventory.
3. In the ***From*** field, select the branch that has the inventory to copy.
4. Click ***Copy*** to clone the inventory of the desired branch.

#### Related Articles

Combos

Combos are made up of one or more choice products. A choice product must be selec...

Choice products

Choice products are additional products or ingredients with which a product must ...

Menu display

The menu display is a tool for changing the order and visibility of categories an...

Modifiers groups

Modifiers groups are associations of different modifiers under the same group. Th...


# Supplements

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611606438614-IMG_Supplements-AN.png)

A supplement is an additional and free product that a customer can add to their order at the end of the process.

***Example:** Utensils, towels, etc.*

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/xOFaD63xnJE>" %}

### Create a supplement

{% embed url="<https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611669291998-VDO_Supplements-AN.mp4>" %}

1. Access the supplements management page through the ***Inventory*** tab for the desired branch.
2. Click ***Create new supplement*** .
3. Give your supplement a name and check the box if the supplement can have a quantity.
4. Click ***Save*** to create your supplement and return to the supplements management page.
5. To edit or delete a supplement, click the edit button for the desired supplement and choose the appropriate action.

#### Related Articles

Categories

A category is made up of products that are similar or correspond to a similar typ...

Modifiers

Modifierss are particular ingredients that can be selected when the user wants to...

Choice products

Choice products are additional products or ingredients with which a product must ...

Clone inventory

Clone inventory allows you to copy the entire inventory from one branch to anothe...


# Hierarchy and menu creation

In order to ensure a menu which will be coherent with your POS system, it will have to be composed with a certain hierarchy and "interlocking" which is at the base of the iShopfood structure. This structure will ensure good navigation in the categories, and will allow the customer to choose his extras, combo and variant for different products, in different categories.

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/0-1ZWBYMlZI>" %}

### Compose a menu efficiently

A product usually has variations, extras, and combos. These 3 quite distinct things. The extras are added to the products, and you can bundle the extras together to save a considerable amount of time.

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1614118255506-1614118255506.png)

[**Click here**](https://www.dropbox.com/home/iShopFood/Service/Documentation%20Formulaire%20nouveau%20client/Menu%20template%20-%20Version%20francaise) to download the table above.<br>


# Services configuration

Administer the parameters of your online ordering platform.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Users and permissions

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611261590379-IMG_User.png)

Users are people who can access your company's online order management interface. You can create and modify them via this page. In addition, you can also choose and assign certain permissions regarding the possible actions of these users.

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/HLdIaPW-7DE>" %}

### Create a new user

1. Go to the "Users" tab on the left in the navigation menu ![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1615556531696-1615556531696.png)
2. Create a user with the desired authorization level: **Employees (Quick configuration: ON), Compagny Admin (Full navigation menu), Reception (Quick configuration: OFF), POS (external POS from the IshopFood backend, this mode is very specific .)**
3. Enter the requested information, include a password and the user's role. Note that the chosen role affects the permissions available to the created user.
4. Once the fields are filled in, click on ***Save*** to create your new user.

### Modify / Delete a user

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611609084253-IMG_Permi-DEL-FR.png)

1. In the user management page, click on the edit icon of the desired user.
2. Choose the desired action.
3. Once the changes are made, click on ***Save*** to return to the user management page.

### Change permissions for a user role

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1615556700533-1615556700533.png)

\
Each user role has specific configuration permissions. Changing permissions affects all users of the selected role.

1. To reach the permissions configuration page, choose a branch, then in the navigation bar, click ***Permissions*** on the ***Configurations*** tab.
2. Choose a role to edit, then select the permissions enabled for that role.
3. Click ***Save*** when your changes are complete.


# Marketing tools

Leverage your ordering service with personalized marketing campaigns.


# Promotions

You can create promotions that will apply to the desired products. Several types of promotions are available (*2 for 1, discounts, hidden products, etc.*) and terms of use apply.

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/Ae8Iam4EnhM>" %}

### Create a promotion

1. On the promotion management page, click ***New promotion*** . Give your promotion a name and then select the type of promotion.
2. ***Normal -*** A reduction applies to the invoice total or to a product.\
   ***X for Y -*** Allow the purchase of a certain number of products for a reduced number ( *Example: 2 for 1* )\
   ***Mobile only -*** A discount applies to the invoice total or to a product, but only to the mobile order.\
   ***When you buy -*** This type of promotion allows you to apply any type of promotion following the addition of a particular product to the invoice. ( *Example: Get 5% off your bill with the purchase of a regular burger.* )
3. Enter the information requested to complete the promotion creation.
4. Add a French version to the requested information by clicking on ***Manage translations*** .
5. Continue to create your promotion by applying the number of uses allowed.
6. Then select how the promotion will be applied: automatic or by entering a promotional code.
7. End the creation by applying a start and end date and link it to a promotion in your existing POS system.
8. Click ***Save*** to create your promotion.
9. Finally, perform a test to verify that your promotion meets your expectations.

### Edit / delete a promotion

1. Click the right edit button of a promotion to edit or delete a promotion.
2. Make your changes and click ***Save*** to return to the promotions management page.
3. Change the start and end dates to make the promotion inaccessible without removing it.
4. Finally, perform a test to verify that your promotion meets your expectations.

### Promotion schedules:

You can set a schedule per hour and day of the week for which you want your promotion to be available. Your promotion will not be applicable outside of these hours.

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1623952745205-1623952745205.png)To add a schedule to your promotion in the relevant promotion, click on "Add a schedule

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1623952840969-1623952840968.png)You can set a schedule per hour and day of the week for which you want your promotion to be available. Your promotion will not be applicable outside of these hours.

#### Related Articles

Promotional pop-up

The iShopFood promotional pop-up allows you to display your promotions in a perso...

Tags

Tags allow you to mark the products you want to include or exclude from your prom...

Schedules by category

If the categories in your menu have special times, you can program a display time...

Upsell

Upsell pop-ups allow you to suggest products to your customers. These pop-ups can...


# Quick config

Access your branch emergency configurations directly.

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td><strong>Quick config</strong></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/MBKm5znk85N8bfZF8luq">/pages/MBKm5znk85N8bfZF8luq</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td><strong>Emergency closure</strong></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/Fp3M2ItHldyybrMwsugr">/pages/Fp3M2ItHldyybrMwsugr</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td><strong>Bypass POS</strong></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/ctcbXT5X9dQaGTZXWxip">/pages/ctcbXT5X9dQaGTZXWxip</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td><strong>Preparation time</strong></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/APQU6FiS8c4KbHHs5KmP">/pages/APQU6FiS8c4KbHHs5KmP</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td><strong>Opening hours</strong></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/nhUXD5DJR420jLVtuU0M">/pages/nhUXD5DJR420jLVtuU0M</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td><strong>Snooze product</strong></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/8Jvrd4AZXcW2d5KIiyqU">/pages/8Jvrd4AZXcW2d5KIiyqU</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Quick config

The ***Quick Config*** page gives you access to useful basic setups for managing the branch of your choice. These configurations are mainly used to resolve urgent problems related to the online ordering interface.

### Go to Quick Config

The ***Quick Config*** page is accessible via the navigation bar in the management page of the desired branch. On the quick setup page, select the desired setup from the drop-down menu.

####


# Emergency closure

Emergency closure prevents customers from ordering through your online ordering interface without disabling ordering. Your menu also remains accessible for consultation by users.

### Activate emergency closure

1. Select the ***Emergency closure*** configuration from the drop-down menu for quick configurations.
2. Activate emergency closure by choosing ***Yes*** from the drop-down menu.
3. If necessary, add a message to inform your customers of the reasons for the closure.
4. Click ***Save*** to activate the configuration.

####


# Bypass POS

The ***Bypass POS*** feature allows you to turn off synchronization between your online ordering service and your existing POS system. If there is no synchronization, you will receive online orders via email.

### Activate Bypass POS

1. Select the ***Bypass POS*** configuration from the drop-down menu for quick configurations.
2. Activate the ***Bypass POS*** by choosing ***Yes*** from the drop-down menu.
3. Add the email address through which orders will be received. You can put more than one email address.
4. Click ***Save*** to activate the configuration.

####


# Preparation time

In the event of high traffic or lack of personnel, you can adapt the minimum preparation times for your products in order to inform customers of the order receipt time. The ***Quick Config*** page allows you to change these settings without having to access the configuration page for each type of control.

### Modify preparation times

1. Select the ***Change Prep*** ***Times*** setup from the ***Quick Config*** drop-down menu.
2. For each type of order, enter the minimum preparation time during which you do not wish to receive an order (in minutes).
3. Click ***Save*** to activate the configuration.

####


# Opening hours

The quick config page allows you to change the availability times for the order types on your online ordering platform. For example, on-site orders can end at 8:00 p.m. while delivery orders end at 11:00 p.m. The ***Quick Config*** page allows you to change these settings without having to access the configuration page for each type of control.

### Change opening hours

1. Select the ***Change opening hours*** configuration from the drop-down menu in the ***quick configs***.
2. For each type of order, add if necessary a time slot for one day by clicking on the ***+*** button. You can add more than one time slot for the same day.
3. Select the hours of operation from the drop-down menus.
4. Click on ***Save*** to finalize the configuration.


# Snooze product

If your inventory is out of stock, you can use the ***Quick config*** page to prevent your products and variations from being ordered. This out of stock may or may not have a fixed period, depending on your needs. The ***Quick config*** page allows you to change these settings without having to access each product's setup page.

### Snooze product

1. Select the ***Snooze product*** configuration from the drop-down menu for ***Quick configs***.
2. Use the ***Product*** field to search and find the desired product or variant.
3. Select the start and end dates for the out of stock.
4. Select a timer that will count down before activating the ***Out of Stock feature*** for the selected product or variant.
5. Click ***Save*** to add this product to your backorder list.
6. Remove a product from the list of out-of-stock products by clicking the ***X*** button for that product.


# Users and permissions

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611261590379-IMG_User.png)

Users are people who can access your company's online order management interface. You can create and modify them via this page. In addition, you can also choose and assign certain permissions regarding the possible actions of these users.

{% embed url="<https://youtu.be/HLdIaPW-7DE>" %}

### Create a new user

1. Go to the "Users" tab on the left in the navigation menu&#x20;

   <figure><img src="https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1615556531696-1615556531696.png" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>
2. Create a user with the desired authorization level: **Employees (Quick configuration: ON), Compagny Admin (Full navigation menu), Reception (Quick configuration: OFF), POS (external POS from the IshopFood backend, this mode is very specific .)**
3. Enter the requested information, include a password and the user's role. Note that the chosen role affects the permissions available to the created user.
4. Once the fields are filled in, click on ***Save*** to create your new user.

### Modify / Delete a user

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1611609084253-IMG_Permi-DEL-FR.png)

1. In the user management page, click on the edit icon of the desired user.
2. Choose the desired action.
3. Once the changes are made, click on ***Save*** to return to the user management page.

### Change permissions for a user role

![](https://s3.amazonaws.com/helpjuice-static/helpjuice_production%2Fuploads%2Fupload%2Fimage%2F8237%2Fdirect%2F1615556700533-1615556700533.png)

\
Each user role has specific configuration permissions. Changing permissions affects all users of the selected role.

1. To reach the permissions configuration page, choose a branch, then in the navigation bar, click ***Permissions*** on the ***Configurations*** tab.
2. Choose a role to edit, then select the permissions enabled for that role.
3. Click ***Save*** when your changes are complete.


# Kiosk


# Maitre'D

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th data-type="files"></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="image">Cover image</th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td></td><td><a href="/files/sEeYuzIiPEqgh8Ds3pU5">/files/sEeYuzIiPEqgh8Ds3pU5</a></td><td><a href="/pages/PoheWpHrOF37v9kO1vDY">/pages/PoheWpHrOF37v9kO1vDY</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xTmxmT6y8mCsrcW7VD9u">/files/xTmxmT6y8mCsrcW7VD9u</a></td><td><a href="/pages/1WDNcGMsgvmuSy6H5mWu">/pages/1WDNcGMsgvmuSy6H5mWu</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td></td><td><a href="/files/vume01NZ0Z5TT27bMdyo">/files/vume01NZ0Z5TT27bMdyo</a></td><td><a href="/pages/tFWoNidawV7Oaqn2SxKU">/pages/tFWoNidawV7Oaqn2SxKU</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td></td><td><a href="/files/4KHmDEvazADYMjlmNxiu">/files/4KHmDEvazADYMjlmNxiu</a></td><td><a href="/pages/7tAMF5tfGlw5TayyRO2x">/pages/7tAMF5tfGlw5TayyRO2x</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td></td><td><a href="/files/Hbf0h03IiO8QWQNtlWk8">/files/Hbf0h03IiO8QWQNtlWk8</a></td><td><a href="/pages/8UGQSmOdyjaVGsiYVpes">/pages/8UGQSmOdyjaVGsiYVpes</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td></td><td><a href="/files/2sqxBo9RooNAJl4FPYBu">/files/2sqxBo9RooNAJl4FPYBu</a></td><td><a href="/pages/hTgEJ67IvaoHmIAoPJOv">/pages/hTgEJ67IvaoHmIAoPJOv</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Maitre'D - Complete Online Documentation

This topic also includes

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Introduction</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/0BWeA9eLGwEGTxfOG9Lg">/pages/0BWeA9eLGwEGTxfOG9Lg</a></td><td><a href="/files/er7VKvAQp3fSRpYGp9EX">/files/er7VKvAQp3fSRpYGp9EX</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>About Maitre'D</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/dU7RWJy6YIidcdraSEIh">/pages/dU7RWJy6YIidcdraSEIh</a></td><td><a href="/files/Hbf0h03IiO8QWQNtlWk8">/files/Hbf0h03IiO8QWQNtlWk8</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 1: Hardware and Software Requirements</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/VzhgOL84h0zlNYHMPSzZ">/pages/VzhgOL84h0zlNYHMPSzZ</a></td><td><a href="/files/2sqxBo9RooNAJl4FPYBu">/files/2sqxBo9RooNAJl4FPYBu</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 2: Installation &#x26; Initial Setup</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/ZHQlIA5ILJVf6HHcuVGK">/pages/ZHQlIA5ILJVf6HHcuVGK</a></td><td><a href="/files/4KHmDEvazADYMjlmNxiu">/files/4KHmDEvazADYMjlmNxiu</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Maitre'D Back-Office</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/xe4XFbaZJvT7Jdk6gk4G">/pages/xe4XFbaZJvT7Jdk6gk4G</a></td><td><a href="/files/vume01NZ0Z5TT27bMdyo">/files/vume01NZ0Z5TT27bMdyo</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Point of Sale Control</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/KEVzJMOQYPGuFfvzgX9f">/pages/KEVzJMOQYPGuFfvzgX9f</a></td><td><a href="/files/xTmxmT6y8mCsrcW7VD9u">/files/xTmxmT6y8mCsrcW7VD9u</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 5: Configuring and Managing Work</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/86w14opuIARACBffa4xr">/pages/86w14opuIARACBffa4xr</a></td><td><a href="/files/PFnoAPubr6pBKF9LYZlD">/files/PFnoAPubr6pBKF9LYZlD</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>System Configuration</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/VTh0Il6Zsgfv5jhdUQ3b">/pages/VTh0Il6Zsgfv5jhdUQ3b</a></td><td><a href="/files/SVyLaNo6AKn6wdUnkB0k">/files/SVyLaNo6AKn6wdUnkB0k</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 7: Server Control</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/8rSZUXUfVWZDhXLtZlwW">/pages/8rSZUXUfVWZDhXLtZlwW</a></td><td><a href="/files/8wjrPebg8kUrgA2hWbgN">/files/8wjrPebg8kUrgA2hWbgN</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 8: Electronic Funds Transfer</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/pvAYesluhItZo5sdLFlQ">/pages/pvAYesluhItZo5sdLFlQ</a></td><td><a href="/files/M5zjlWEUx5uejGMiefqh">/files/M5zjlWEUx5uejGMiefqh</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 9: Report Center</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/dUgdmAvEBSERKlUiCkFZ">/pages/dUgdmAvEBSERKlUiCkFZ</a></td><td><a href="/files/4KhfMyzyiO3BrFHs5CQs">/files/4KhfMyzyiO3BrFHs5CQs</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 10: Database</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/MPQ72eOjwl5xAQTfQsiv">/pages/MPQ72eOjwl5xAQTfQsiv</a></td><td><a href="/files/aNX3AYXVCKZbT89ntEHt">/files/aNX3AYXVCKZbT89ntEHt</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 11: Inventory Management </td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/l2pPlWQ69j54nCeoIu0X">/pages/l2pPlWQ69j54nCeoIu0X</a></td><td><a href="/files/SuBUlVSHPvYHaqX6PqQo">/files/SuBUlVSHPvYHaqX6PqQo</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 12: Delivery</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/rOnw31jQBPV5scwgRY0H">/pages/rOnw31jQBPV5scwgRY0H</a></td><td><a href="/files/5nEII23is9tofR56TPzX">/files/5nEII23is9tofR56TPzX</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 13: Time and Attendance</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/W9MpSEREDj8oKMci5OuX">/pages/W9MpSEREDj8oKMci5OuX</a></td><td><a href="/files/tsdDzteu5Qi6StvKGlv4">/files/tsdDzteu5Qi6StvKGlv4</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 14: Account Receivable</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/kBCukZlZW9bOw0uGKLfW">/pages/kBCukZlZW9bOw0uGKLfW</a></td><td><a href="/files/YYIuD4wSy2nUTwb5IUNh">/files/YYIuD4wSy2nUTwb5IUNh</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 15: Accounting Interface</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/w6UgQWr5OHDfyG6Ndj9w">/pages/w6UgQWr5OHDfyG6Ndj9w</a></td><td><a href="/files/tsdDzteu5Qi6StvKGlv4">/files/tsdDzteu5Qi6StvKGlv4</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 16: Floor Management </td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/7Y89rgYhZB7Mby5MP8MY">/pages/7Y89rgYhZB7Mby5MP8MY</a></td><td><a href="/files/M3ovL3USTGcEla0OuDTb">/files/M3ovL3USTGcEla0OuDTb</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Chap 17: Converter </td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/lLIffTwqqw8pZ4xPlEkT">/pages/lLIffTwqqw8pZ4xPlEkT</a></td><td><a href="/files/p7vdMsdHuR0YNBW8Zs4C">/files/p7vdMsdHuR0YNBW8Zs4C</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Appendix: Troubleshooting</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/QiugMylwtly0xfXEFuVJ">/pages/QiugMylwtly0xfXEFuVJ</a></td><td><a href="/files/WO8jflMhvRBkonPHfget">/files/WO8jflMhvRBkonPHfget</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Introduction</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/5kcrCgqJ6ucZheSJ7P0p">/pages/5kcrCgqJ6ucZheSJ7P0p</a></td><td><a href="/files/sEeYuzIiPEqgh8Ds3pU5">/files/sEeYuzIiPEqgh8Ds3pU5</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Introduction

### Copyright & Legal Information

World rights reserved. No part of this publication may be stored in a retrieval system, transmitted, or reproduced in any way, including but not limited to photocopy, photograph, magnetic, or other record, without the prior agreement and written permission of PayFacto Inc.

***

### Trademarks

Maitre'D, the Maitre'D logo, e-Global, Databoard® and MealZone® are trademarks or registered trademarks of PayFacto Inc. in Canada and other countries and may not be used without written permission from PayFacto Inc. Windows is a trademark or a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. PayFacto is not associated with any product or vendor mentioned in this document.

PayFacto Inc has made every effort to prepare this document, and the content is based upon the release of Maitre'D 7.08. Portions of the manuscript may be based upon pre-release versions supplied by software manufacturer(s). PayFacto Inc. makes no representation or warranties of any kind with regard to the completeness or accuracy of the contents herein and accepts no liability of any kind caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly from this document.

For general information on Maitre'D and other products and services from PayFacto Inc, please visit our website at <https://payfacto.com>.

***

### Audience

The Maitre'D Online User Manual is intended primarily for restaurant owners and managers, but it is equally suited for corporate IT departments, Maitre'D resellers and restaurant employees. This manual provides general information on the use of the Maitre'D Software Suite and introduces the reader to the many features of Maitre'D. It can be used by first time users to familiarize themselves with the Maitre'D Software Suite, or by seasoned users who want to learn more on how to apply the powerful features of Maitre'D to streamline their restaurant business.

***

### Conventions

The following symbols are used throughout this manual to highlight a special section and to introduce the reader to new features in Maitre'D.

{% hint style="success" %}
TIP: This symbol indicates a tip on how to use Maitre'D more efficiently.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! This symbol emphasizes an important section.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This symbol emphasizes useful complimentary information.
{% endhint %}

{% hint style="info" %}
This symbol indicates that an optional Maitre'D module or Interface is being explained.
{% endhint %}

***

### Sample Restaurant Database

The Maitre'D Installation DVD and downloaded files contains a sample database that can be installed with Maitre'D during installation. This database contains the necessary pre-configured information to have a Maitre'D system up and running such as employees, items and preferential screens. The sample database contains fictitious sales data that is installed for demo purposes only, and should not be installed in a live environment.

Examples used to illustrate topics in this manual are based on the data and configuration found in this sample database. It is important to note that most restaurant businesses will be configured differently, depending on their needs and the options they have selected. The examples presented in this manual are nevertheless easy to understand and can be transposed to most situations.

***

### Using the Help Menu

#### Help Topics

Maitre'D has a built-in context sensitive help feature that users can refer to when they need to find out more about a specific function or feature. Many Maitre'D Back-Office windows have a small question mark box on the top right hand corner of the screen. This question mark can be dragged and dropped on any element in a screen. If a help topic associated with this component exists, then a window will appear and the help information will be displayed to the user.

![Accessing Help through Question mark](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/UsingHelpMenu/01%20-%20Help%20Topics%201.png)

![Help System Screenshot](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/UsingHelpMenu/02%20-%20Help%20Topics%202.png)

To display the entire help file, the Help Topics option is selected in the Help menu of any of the Back-Office applications.

![Help Topics Menu Item](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/UsingHelpMenu/03%20-%20Help%20Topics%203.png)

***

### Maitre'D Online

For further information, consult the Maitre'D website at <https://PayFacto.com> or contact an authorized Maitre'D reseller for support.


# About Maitre'D

### About Maitre'D

Maitre'D is a Point Of Sale Software Suite with an integrated Back-Office application that allows restaurants to manage their operations from front-end sales to inventory control and employee management. Maitre'D helps restaurant owners and managers streamline and centralize operations, track the status of the restaurant in real time, analyze data and follow trends from past periods, and plan for the future. The following points highlight key features that make Maitre'D an indispensable tool for any restaurant.

***

### Easy to use customizable screens

The Maitre'D Point Of Sale workstation screens provide an elegant yet intelligent user interface that simplifies order entry and management functions. This means that customers are serviced more quickly, and it is easier to train new employees on the system. Using the Maitre'D POS Screen Designer, the user interface of each workstation can be completely customized to suit the look and needs of any restaurant.

***

### Centralized Management Functions

The Maitre'D Back-Office allows restaurants to manage everything from one central location. Every task from managing inventory to managing employees and time schedules can be done using the Maitre'D Back-Office Suite. By centralizing management functions, the restaurant owner or manager can access real time information about the restaurant and make timely decisions when required. All common management functions can also be accessed using any Point Of Sale workstation connected to the network.

***

### Support for a Wide Range of Peripheral Devices

Maitre'D supports a wide range of industry standard peripheral devices such as scales, biometric reading devices, scanners and more. By fully supporting OLE for Retail POS (OPOS) Drivers, Maitre'D is compatible with all major peripheral devices in the industry that can be connected using a serial, parallel, USB or an IP connection.

***

### Wireless and Handheld Support

Supporting the latest wireless network technologies, wireless Maitre'D networks eliminate the need to hide connection wires that may otherwise be difficult to conceal in a restaurant environment. Maitre'D allows restaurants to mix and match traditional wire based networks with wireless networks allowing heterogeneous networks to seamlessly integrate with each other.

With wireless handheld support, wireless Point Of Sale devices can be connected to the main network, offering mobility to restaurant staff.Wireless scanning devices can scan inventory items and directly input the data in the Maitre'D inventory database making inventory counting a breeze.

***

### Real Time Inventory Management

Using the Inventory Management module, all items in the inventory can be monitored in real time. This allows the restaurant to control food cost, reduce waste items and generate up to date inventory reports. The Inventory Management module also features an advanced Purchase Order Management system that facilitates ordering.

***

### Quick Service Restaurant (QSR) and Drive Thru Functions

Designed for quick but effective operation, the QSR and Drive-Thru functions include customizable macros that allow restaurants to program a sequence of order events for quick processing, and a new combo engine for automatic combo discount detection. The Maitre'D Software Suite supports multiple drive-thru lanes, as well as a kitchen monitor for order efficiency.

***

### Delivery and Dispatch Module

The Delivery module allows orders to be quickly taken over the phone and entered in the Maitre'D system. Orders are forwarded automatically to the kitchen and checks can quickly be printed. When the customer information is keyed in, the system stores it for future orders thereby generating a database of customers. The Delivery module manages drivers by optimizing their routes, and provides an interface with Microsoft® MapPoint®.

***

### Floor Management

The Floor Management module is an easy to use graphical interface that uses a graphical representation of the restaurant allowing customers to be seated quickly and the restaurant seating space to be used optimally. The purpose of the Floor Management Module is to distribute guests evenly among servers so that every server is occupied during all periods. Real time alerts warn restaurant employees if customers are waiting to be served, or are waiting to pay, and managers can keep track of service levels using the Floor Management application.

Restaurants can create multiple floor plans based on the number of servers working at different times of the day. For example, a floor plan with three servers can be created for lunch, and a floor plan with 7 servers can be created for dinner.

One of the powerful features of the Floor Management module is the waiting list. The waiting list is enabled when all tables in the restaurant are occupied, and allow hostesses and servers to keep track of guests waiting for a table. Using the waiting list, guests can order drinks at the bar, and the bartender can start a tab using the guest information found on the waiting list. When a table is ready and the guests are seated, the running tab can be transferred directly to the table and guests only pay at the end of their meal.

The Floor Management module also offers a set of reports that can be customized, and help analyze employee performance.

***

### Redundancy and Security

A redundant server can be configured to insure that in case of primary server failure, the redundant server will take over and allow uninterrupted service. For convenience, one of the Point of Sale workstations can be configured to act as a redundant server, saving costs because the restaurant does not need to invest in a separate computer to host the redundant server. A convenient Restore function allows the redundant server to transfer control back to the primary server as well as any updated data.

***

### Table Service Restaurant (TSR)

Loaded with features such as Hold and Fire, customizable meals,“On the fly”modifiers, and instructions for special orders, the Maitre'D Table Service Restaurant (TSR) solution allows servers to offer the highest level of table service to customers and provide them with an exceptional dining experience.

With built-in support for both a central cashier\
configuration and a server banking configuration, Maitre'D TSR can adapt to any restaurant business model.

***

### Employee and Payroll Management

Employees can be managed using the Maitre'D Back-Office. Employees can clock-in and clock-out directly from any Point of Sale workstation thereby eliminating the need for an expensive third party time tracking hardware. Maitre'D also provides a graphical view of the employee schedule and instantly provides a list of availabilities. Using the payroll interface, payroll data can be transferred to an accounting software system such as Automatic Data Processing (ADP) ®.

Maitre'D also provides an analysis of labor costs versus revenue in real time so that managers can determine if they are over-staffed or under-staffed at any given time. This feature allows restaurants to control labor costs while ensuring that customers are receiving the best service.

***

### Integrated Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT)

A fully integrated electronic funds transfer (EFT) module allows Point of Sale transactions information to be sent to debit and credit card processors, speeding up transaction processing time. This ensures accuracy throughout the transaction by limiting keypunch errors.

If you are using a generic EFT interface, Maitre'D is compatible with a wide variety of industry standard processors. Internet Processing support allows credit card transactions to be completed within 2 or 3 seconds through a completely secure Internet channel.

***

### Customizable Reporting Features

The Maitre'D Report Center provides a comprehensive set of reports that can be customized to answer the specific needs of any restaurant. Built using the industry standard Crystal Reports ® reporting tools, Maitre'D reports are easy to use, easy to customize and packed with features. Furthermore, as new optional modules are installed, new reports become available in the report center.

***

### Accounting Interfaces and Modules

The accounting modules allow restaurants to manage accounts receivable and print invoices and monthly reports, as well as manage their accounts payable and general ledger. The accounting interfaces allow data to be transferred to almost every major accounting software such as ACCPAC® and QuickBooks™.

***

### Web-based Reporting and Real Time Alerts using DataBoard®

With Maitre'D Databoard®, restaurants can send data to a central website that can be accessed over the Internet. Restaurants can publish reports from Maitre'D to an Internet website, and service packs can be deployed from one central location. Maitre'D Databoard® can be set up to send real time alerts to devices such as pagers, cell phones, or a customized email can be sent to a list of recipients. Encrypted transmissions over a secure Internet channel to transmit information and enforced password protection ensure that all communication between the user and the central website are safe and reliable.

***

### Centralized Database Management using Maitre'D e-Global and Broadcasting

The Maitre'D e-Global Suite allows incremental database information from all restaurants to be sent to a corporate office location for backup and storage on a daily basis. Another powerful feature of Maitre'D e-Global is Broadcasting. This allows the corporate office to push database information, such as new screens or item prices, directly from the corporate office to the individual restaurants. The corporate office system can be programmed to send the data on specific dates thereby automating all updates.

***

### Cooking Schedule Management

The Maitre'D cooking schedule organizes the schedule for items on the menu that take time to prepare and ensures that items advertised on the restaurant menu are always available. Based on past sales, the cooking schedule determines the quantity of an item to prepare for any given time period.

Real time display warns employees when item levels are low, and the cooking schedule constantly updates itself in real time to display the quantity remaining.

***

### Purchase Order Management

Using the Maitre'D Inventory Management module, purchase orders can be generated and tracked. When items in the purchase order are received in Maitre'D, the system automatically updates the inventory levels. Maitre'D offers a versatile purchase order system with a powerful wizard function that uses past sales history and future projections to determine what items to order and the quantities to order. Based on the Product Mix formula, the purchase order wizard can generate purchase orders based on minimum and maximum inventory levels, based on the production schedule, or based on sales history. Other features such as copying from a previous purchase order and setting up recurrent purchase orders simplify the ordering process.

Purchase order information can be exported through the Maitre'D Accounts Payable Interface to a 3rd party accounts payable software for processing.

***

### Message Center

Restaurant managers can send customized messages to specific employees or a group of employees using the Maitre'D Message Center. The message will display the first time the employee logs in, enters a sales transaction, clocks or accesses other employee functions. The manager can attach an employee schedule with the message, and the employee can print the message as well as the attached schedule.

***

### Frequent Diner and Rewards

Loyal customers can be rewarded using the Frequent Diner feature. A database of Frequent Diner Customers is stored in the Maitre'D database, and Frequent Diner Promotions can be offered to these customers. The Frequent Diner Customer database information can be distributed to multiple locations so that Frequent Diners can receive their perks in every restaurant belonging to that chain.

Restaurants can also offer Rewards Coupons to guests when their purchases reach a certain amount. The coupons print automatically when the check is acquitted and restaurants can configure Maitre'D to print different promotions at different times of the day and of the week. For example, when guests purchase sales items that equal 15$ or more at breakfast time, the restaurant can give a Rewards Coupon for a free medium sized French fries when they buy a cheeseburger at lunch time. Similarly, if guests purchase for 15$ or over at lunchtime, they will receive a Rewards Coupon for a free beer during happy hour. The Rewards system is a great way to encourage guests to return to the restaurant.

***

### Front Desk Hotel Interface

The Maitre'D system provides full integration with major hotel Front Desk systems allowing Maitre'D transactions to be posted directly on hotel bills for customers residing in the hotel.

***

### MealZone

Maitre'D MealZone is a web-based application that allows restaurants to offer their menus online for customers wishing to order their meals using the Internet.

The Maitre'D MealZone is linked to the Maitre'D Point of Sale via the Back-Office. Orders that are placed using the restaurant website can be sent directly to the kitchen printer so that they are processed immediately. Customers receive an email to confirm that their order was placed, and also an email to let them know when their order is ready. With Maitre'D MealZone, there is no need for manual entry thereby eliminating the risk of making mistakes and saving valuable time and resources.

***

## Multi-Language Support

With built-in multi-language support, Maitre'D is designed to function in English, French and in Spanish. The system can also be configured to use one language when an employee accesses a Point Of Sale workstation and another language when the customer check is printed. For example, the POS workstations can display the information in Spanish when a server is entering an order, but the customer's check will print in English.

The Maitre'D Open Architecture allows for other ISO 8859-1 (LATIN 1) languages to be configured using an XML file. For example, an XML file can be created to support German, Danish or Italian, and easily incorporated into Maitre'D.


# Chap 1: Hardware and Software Requirements

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Hardware Requirements</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/WpLahM7DrXWbVZBF2GHb">/pages/WpLahM7DrXWbVZBF2GHb</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Optional Hardware Components</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/syFK7MbSjjVDRxF92Mfr">/pages/syFK7MbSjjVDRxF92Mfr</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Evaluating Hardware</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/HdfPBfw9MzRMM08evZ6T">/pages/HdfPBfw9MzRMM08evZ6T</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Operating System Requirements </td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/BzCkjJa0O1DikFQQ2fGG">/pages/BzCkjJa0O1DikFQQ2fGG</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Unsupported Operating Systems</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/DnFV8tHx0cJEZNUxONWD">/pages/DnFV8tHx0cJEZNUxONWD</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Software Requirements</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/UEQ4VmLurqpQ4yR206N8">/pages/UEQ4VmLurqpQ4yR206N8</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Hardware Requirements

## Hardware Requirements

To facilitate reading and interpretation of hardware requirements, they are broken down in 3 tiers:

### Minimum

The minimum requirement is the bare minimum that will allow the Maitre'D Advanced POS User Interface to operate adequately, without any consideration for possible expansion or "future-proofing".

#### Recommended

The recommended hardware configuration should yield adequate performance in most situations and provide headroom for future expansion of the system.

#### Large Sites / High Volume

The hardware configuration for large sites should yield adequate performance in restaurants using 20 or more POS workstations. This requirement also applies to restaurants with high volume of orders, where the number of POS workstations may not be as high as 20, but where the POS Workstations are in near-constant use.

***

### Hardware Requirements for the Maitre'D Back-Office PC, Auxiliary Back-Office and Backup Server

| Hardware           | Recommended                                                                                                                                                 | Large sites                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|                    |                                                                                                                                                             |                                                                                                                                                             |
| Operating System   | [See Operating System Requirements](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-1-hardware-and-software-requirements/operating-system-requirements) | [See Operating System Requirements](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-1-hardware-and-software-requirements/operating-system-requirements) |
| CPU                | <p>Intel Core i5 2300 series</p><p>or better</p>                                                                                                            | <p>Intel Core i7 2600 series</p><p>or better</p>                                                                                                            |
| RAM                | 8Gb                                                                                                                                                         | 16Gb                                                                                                                                                        |
| Storage            | <p>SATA SSD</p><p>5Gb (installation)</p><p>+</p><p>10Gb (storage)</p>                                                                                       | <p>NVMe SSD</p><p>5Gb (installation)</p><p>+</p><p>10Gb (storage)</p>                                                                                       |
| Graphics           | DirectX 9 compatible or later                                                                                                                               | DirectX 9 compatible or later                                                                                                                               |
| Display            | 1920 x 1080                                                                                                                                                 | 1920 x 1080                                                                                                                                                 |
| Network            | Gigabit                                                                                                                                                     | Gigabit or better                                                                                                                                           |
| Pointing Device    | Mouse or equivalent                                                                                                                                         | Mouse or equivalent                                                                                                                                         |
| Printer (optional) | <p>Ink jet or laser,</p><p>US Letter or A4</p>                                                                                                              | <p>Ink jet or laser,</p><p>US Letter or A4</p>                                                                                                              |

***

### Hardware Requirements for the Legacy POS

<table data-header-hidden><thead><tr><th width="149"></th><th></th><th></th><th></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Hardware</td><td>Minimum</td><td>Recommended</td><td>High Volume</td></tr><tr><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Operating System</td><td><a href="/pages/BzCkjJa0O1DikFQQ2fGG">See Operating System Requirements</a></td><td><a href="/pages/BzCkjJa0O1DikFQQ2fGG">See Operating System Requirements</a></td><td><a href="/pages/BzCkjJa0O1DikFQQ2fGG">See Operating System Requirements</a></td></tr><tr><td>CPU</td><td>1 Ghz</td><td>Any Dual Core</td><td>Dual Core, 2 Ghz or better</td></tr><tr><td>RAM</td><td>4Gb</td><td>4Gb</td><td>4Gb</td></tr><tr><td>Storage (free space)</td><td>500Mb</td><td>500Mb</td><td>500Mb</td></tr><tr><td>Graphics</td><td>DirectX 9 compatible or later</td><td>DirectX 9 compatible or later</td><td>DirectX 9 compatible or later</td></tr><tr><td>Display</td><td>800 x 600</td><td>1024 x 768</td><td>1024 x 768 or better</td></tr><tr><td>Network</td><td>Gigabit</td><td>Gigabit</td><td>Gigabit or better</td></tr><tr><td>Pointing Device</td><td>Resistive touch screen</td><td>Projected Capacitive touch screen</td><td>Projected Capacitive touch screen</td></tr></tbody></table>

***

### Hardware Requirements for the Advanced POS User Interface (HTML POS)

| Hardware             | Minimum                                                                                                                                   | Recommended                                                                                                                               | High Volume                                                                                                                               |
| -------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|                      |                                                                                                                                           |                                                                                                                                           |                                                                                                                                           |
| Operating System     | <p><a href="/pages/BzCkjJa0O1DikFQQ2fGG">See Operating System Requirements</a></p><p>Windows 10 Pro, IoT, Enterprise</p><p>Windows 11</p> | <p><a href="/pages/BzCkjJa0O1DikFQQ2fGG">See Operating System Requirements</a></p><p>Windows 10 Pro, IoT, Enterprise</p><p>Windows 11</p> | <p><a href="/pages/BzCkjJa0O1DikFQQ2fGG">See Operating System Requirements</a></p><p>Windows 10 Pro, IoT, Enterprise</p><p>Windows 11</p> |
| CPU                  | <p>Intel Celeron J1900</p><p>or better</p>                                                                                                | <p>Intel Celeron J4105</p><p>or better</p>                                                                                                | <p>Intel Core i3 2100 series</p><p>or better</p>                                                                                          |
| RAM                  | 4Gb                                                                                                                                       | 8Gb                                                                                                                                       | 8Gb                                                                                                                                       |
| Storage (free space) | 1Gb                                                                                                                                       | 1Gb                                                                                                                                       | 1Gb                                                                                                                                       |
| Graphics             | DirectX 11 compatible or later                                                                                                            | DirectX 11 compatible or later                                                                                                            | DirectX 11 compatible or later                                                                                                            |
| Display              | 1024 x 768                                                                                                                                | 1024 x 768 or better                                                                                                                      | 1024 x 768 or better                                                                                                                      |
| Network              | Gigabit                                                                                                                                   | Gigabit                                                                                                                                   | Gigabit or better                                                                                                                         |
| Pointing Device      | Resistive touch screen                                                                                                                    | Projected Capacitive touch screen                                                                                                         | Projected Capacitive touch screen                                                                                                         |

***

### Hardware Requirements for Android Tablets running the Maitre'D Mobile POS app (MPOS)

| Hardware          | Minimum                                                                                                        | Recommended                                                                 |
| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|                   |                                                                                                                |                                                                             |
| Operating System  | Android 10                                                                                                     | Android 11 or later                                                         |
| CPU               | <p>Samsung Exynos 9611 or better</p><p>Qualcomm Snapdragon 662 or better</p><p>Unisoc Tiger T618 or better</p> | <p>Samsung Exynos 990 or better</p><p>Qualcomm Snapdragon 865 or better</p> |
| RAM               | 4Gb or more                                                                                                    | 6Gb or more                                                                 |
| Storage           | 32Gb or more                                                                                                   | 64Gb or more                                                                |
| Screen Size       | 10'' or more                                                                                                   | 10'' or more                                                                |
| Screen Resolution | 1080 x 1920 or better                                                                                          | 1200 x 2000 or better                                                       |

***

### Hardware Requirements for Apple iPad Tablets running the Maitre'D Mobile POS app (MPOS)

| Hardware          | Minimum                     | Recommended                |
| ----------------- | --------------------------- | -------------------------- |
|                   |                             |                            |
| Operating System  | iOS 14                      | iOS 14 or later            |
| CPU               | Apple A10X Fusion or better | Apple A12 Bionic or better |
| RAM               | 3Gb or more                 | 3Gb or more                |
| Storage           | 32Gb or more                | 64Gb or more               |
| Screen Size       | 10'' or more                | 10'' or more               |
| Screen Resolution | 1080 x 1920 or better       | 1200 x 2000 or better      |

***

### Hardware Requirements for Windows 11

In some cases, Windows 11 may have more stringent hardware requirements than Maitre'D. If you wish to use your POS system with Windows 11, these requirements need to be accounted for:

| Component       | Minimum                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| --------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| CPU             | 1 Gigahertz (GHZ) or faster, with 2 or more cores on a [compatible 64-bit processor](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-ca/windows-hardware/design/minimum/windows-processor-requirements) or System on a Chip (SoC). |
| RAM             | 4 gigabyte (GB) for POS workstations or 8 gigabyte (GB) for a back-office PC, auxiliary back-office, or backup server.                                                                                           |
| Storage         | 64 GB or larger.                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| System Firmware | UEFI, Secure Boot capable.                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| TPM             | Trusted Platform Module (TPM) version 2.0.                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Graphics Card   | Compatible with DirectX 12 or later with WDDM 2.0 driver.                                                                                                                                                        |
| Display         | High definition (720p) display that is greater than 9'' diagonally, 8 bits per color channel.                                                                                                                    |

### Additional Information

[List of compatible Intel Processors](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-ca/windows-hardware/design/minimum/supported/windows-11-supported-intel-processors)

[List of compatible AMD Processors](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-ca/windows-hardware/design/minimum/supported/windows-11-supported-amd-processors)

[Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Technology Overview](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/security/information-protection/tpm/trusted-platform-module-overview)


# Optional Hardware Components

### Optional hardware components and manufacturers

Below is a list of optional hardware components and manufacturers supported by Maitre'D.

***

### Magnetic Card Reader

* USB
* Keyboard wedge
* RS-232 (serial)
* OPOS

***

### Customer Display

* AEDEX
* Epson ESC/POS compatible
* Mintronix
* Tekvision
* OPOS

***

### Scale

* Toledo 8213, 8217
* Weigh-Tronix 6710

***

### Cash Drawer

* RS-232 (serial) with or without status
* Through a parallel or serial printer
* OPOS

***

### Kitchen Monitor

* KDS Kitchen Display System from PayFacto
* QSR ePIC (QSR Automation)

***

### Barcode Scanner

* USB
* Keyboard wedge
* RS-232 (serial)

***

### Fingerprint Recognition (biometric devices)

* Digital Persona U.are.U 2000, 2000b and 2400b

***

### Cash Card Reader

* ITC System 1015 or 2015

***

### Fiscal Printer

* Epson TMu200AF for Venezuela
* Québec Sales Recording Module (SRM) – Module d’Enregistrement des Ventes (MEV)
* Belgium Black Box

***

### Surveillance Camera

* Kodicom I3DVR
* Generic XML interface

***

### Bar Dispenser

* Azbar
* Berg
* Auper
* Scanabar

***

### Remote Display

* Texas Digital Accuview
* Delphi Display Systems

***

### EMV Credit/Debit Payment Devices

* See the documentation specific to your processor of choice for detailed lists of supported EMV Credit/Debit Payment Devices.


# Evaluating Hardware

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Evaluating Hardware</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/DLlCO8AdcD5IYtEGjSKl">/pages/DLlCO8AdcD5IYtEGjSKl</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Performance Indicators</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/AiqCiZfSLJlI63pVveiv">/pages/AiqCiZfSLJlI63pVveiv</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Sample Hardware Configurations</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/4fjYL2PU6FnKGftOKxdK">/pages/4fjYL2PU6FnKGftOKxdK</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Evaluating Hardware

### Evaluating Hardware

With modern computer hardware, the speed of the CPU (in Mhz or Ghz) and the core count alone are no longer enough to determine if a given system will perform adequately. There are many more factors to consider, such as the architecture of the CPU, its generation, the technology it is based on, its power consumption, the amount of RAM available, etc.

***

### Benchmarks

The only way to reliably compare CPU’s is by looking at their respective benchmark results. Synthetic benchmark tests compound all CPU attributes into a single numeric score value. Quite simply put, the higher the score, the better the CPU is.

***

### CPUBenchmark.net

PassMark Software’s CPU benchmark is a highly regarded database that contains all the information required to compare millions of different CPU models. The database can be consulted here:

[Cpubenchmark.net Website](https://www.cpubenchmark.net/)

By searching this database and using the provided “Compare” tool, it is easy to determine if the hardware that you plan to buy (or already have) will meet or surpass the performance of the recommended hardware configuration.


# Performance indicators

### Performance indicators

Here are a few performance indicators we can use to measure the performance:

***

### CPU Benchmark Score

This is the score of the CPU posted on <https://www.cpubenchmark.net/>. Note that the posted scores are averages and may vary daily. Higher is better.

***

### Minimum Keystroke Delay

This is the minimum time, in milliseconds, that the user needs to wait between keystrokes to avoid visible lag and missed keystrokes. Lower is better.

#### Methodology

This value is measured in a lab environment using a tool built into the POS software.

The input keystrokes and the POS' output are compared, and the delay is shortened until one of two things happen:

1. The POS starts "missing" keystrokes. (i.e. a key is pressed but the POS fails to register it), or;
2. There is visible lag, meaning there is a significant and clearly visible delay between the keystroke and the information appearing on the screen.

The delay between keystrokes is then increased gradually until the POS can reliably process all keystrokes without missing one and without creating significant lag, for a period of at least one full minute.

***

### Maximum keys / second

This is the maximum theoretical number of keystrokes per second that a user can achieve without causing the POS to lag. Higher is better.

#### Methodology

This value is calculated from the minimum keystroke delay. For example, with a minimum keystroke delay of 100 milliseconds, we can have a theoretical maximum of 10 keystrokes per second.

***

### Maximum keys / minute

This is the maximum theoretical number of keystrokes per minute that a user can achieve without causing the POS to lag. Higher is better.

#### Methodology

This figure is obtained by multiplying Max Keys / Second by 60. This figure is used to put the keystroke delay and keys per second values in perspective. Knowing that an average typist can do between 190 and 200 keystrokes per minute on a keyboard, while a "two-finger" typist does 150 to 160, this figure makes it easy to determine if the POS hardware will be able to keep up with the employees using it.


# Target Scores

### Sample hardware configurations

Multiple hardware configurations were tested in a controlled lab environment during the development of the HTML POS. These can be used as benchmarks to compare the hardware you already have or plan to buy.

***

### System #1: Minimum

The first system tested is an All-in-One POS with the lowest hardware specification that was tested in our labs. It is also the oldest, with a manufacture date of late 2008. Still, even at this age, the hardware is slightly above the minimum requirements for the Maitre'D Legacy POS.

| System #1: Minimum                     |                                                                        |
| -------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Operating System                       | Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSC, Version 1809, 32-bit Edition |
| CPU                                    | Intel Atom N270 (Single-Core @ 1.60Ghz, Mobile CPU, Released Q2-2008   |
| RAM                                    | 1Gb                                                                    |
| Storage                                | 120Gb SATA-SSD                                                         |
| Graphics                               | Intel Integrated Graphics (DirectX 9 compatible)                       |
| Display                                | 1024 x 768                                                             |
| Network                                | 100 Mbps                                                               |
| Pointing Device                        | Resistive touch screen                                                 |
| **Performance Data (Advancec POS UI)** |                                                                        |
| CPU Benchmark Score                    | 269                                                                    |
| Minimum Keystroke Delay                | 500 m/s                                                                |
| Maximum Keys per Second                | 2                                                                      |
| Maximum Keys per Minute                | 120                                                                    |

### System #1 Conclusion

This system is not adequate for HTML POS, however it works just fine with the Maitre'D Legacy POS. If you have older hardware available which can be upgraded to Windows 10 IoT Enterprise, it can still be put to good use for a budget POS system using the Legacy POS software.

***

### System #2: Tablet PC

This system is a Windows 10 Tablet PC, optimized for long battery life.

| System #2: Tablet PC                   |                                                                                 |
| -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Operating System                       | Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB, Version 1607, 64-bit Edition          |
| CPU                                    | Intel Atom Z3745 (Quad-Core @ 1.33Ghz, "Bay Trail" Mobile CPU, Released Q1-2014 |
| RAM                                    | 4Gb                                                                             |
| Storage                                | 120Gb SATA-SSD                                                                  |
| Graphics                               | Intel Integrated Graphics (DirectX 9 compatible)                                |
| Display                                | 1280 x 800                                                                      |
| Network                                | Gigabit (on dock) or 802.11n WiFi                                               |
| Pointing Device                        | Multi-touch Projected Capacitive touch screen                                   |
| **Performance Data (Advancec POS UI)** |                                                                                 |
| CPU Benchmark Score                    | 1079                                                                            |
| Minimum Keystroke Delay                | 300 m/s                                                                         |
| Maximum Keys per Second                | 3.33                                                                            |
| Maximum Keys per Minute                | 200                                                                             |

### System #2 Conclusion

While HTML POS was usable on this system, it was a bit on the slow side. However, this is a very good wireless solution for the Legacy Maitre'D POS.

***

### System #3: NUC form factor PC

This system is a Windows 10 NUC form factor PC with a very small footprint. The enclosure of this device measures only 5 in x 5 in, with a thickness if about 1.25 in.

| Operating System                       | Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB, Version 1607, 64-bit Edition                |
| -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| CPU                                    | Intel Atom x5-Z8350 (Quad-Core @ 1.44Ghz, "Cherry Trail" Mobile CPU, Released Q1-2016 |
| RAM                                    | 4Gb                                                                                   |
| Storage                                | 256Gb SD Card                                                                         |
| Graphics                               | Intel Integrated Graphics (DirectX 9 compatible)                                      |
| Display                                | 1024 x 768                                                                            |
| Network                                | Gigabit                                                                               |
| Pointing Device                        | Mouse                                                                                 |
| **Performance Data (Advancec POS UI)** |                                                                                       |
| CPU Benchmark Score                    | 1273                                                                                  |
| Minimum Keystroke Delay                | 300 m/s                                                                               |
| Maximum Keys per Second                | 3.33                                                                                  |
| Maximum Keys per Minute                | 200                                                                                   |

### System #3 Conclusion

While HTML POS was also usable on this system, the performance gain from the slightly better CPU was marginal and could not be measured. This is a very good solution for the Legacy Maitre'D POS if you need a low cost and space-efficient solution.

***

### System #4: POS hardware

This system is an All-in-One Windows 10 POS workstation.

| System #4: POS Hardware                |                                                                                    |
| -------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Operating System                       | Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB, Version 1607, 64-bit Edition             |
| CPU                                    | Intel Celeron J1900 (Quad-Core @ 2.00Ghz, "Bay Trail" Mobile CPU, Released Q4-2013 |
| RAM                                    | 4Gb                                                                                |
| Storage                                | 256Gb SATA SSD                                                                     |
| Graphics                               | Intel Integrated Graphics (DirectX 9 compatible)                                   |
| Display                                | 1366 x 768                                                                         |
| Network                                | Gigabit                                                                            |
| Pointing Device                        | Multi-touch Projected Capacitive touch screen                                      |
| **Performance Data (Advancec POS UI)** |                                                                                    |
| CPU Benchmark Score                    | 1852                                                                               |
| Minimum Keystroke Delay                | 300 m/s                                                                            |
| Maximum Keys per Second                | 3.33                                                                               |
| Maximum Keys per Minute                | 200                                                                                |

***

### System #4 Conclusion

While HTML POS was also usable on this system, the performance gain from the slightly better CPU was marginal and could not be measured. This hardware is more than adequate for the Maitre'D Legacy POS, however.

***

### System #5: High-End POS hardware

This system is a high-end, All-in-One Windows 10 POS workstation.

| System #5: High-End POS Hardware       |                                                                                       |
| -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Operating System                       | Microsoft Windows 10 Pro, Version 1903, 64-bit Edition                                |
| CPU                                    | Intel Core i3-2125 (Dual-Core @ 3.30Ghz, "Sandy Bridge" Desktop CPU, Released Q3-2011 |
| RAM                                    | 8Gb                                                                                   |
| Storage                                | 256Gb SATA SSD                                                                        |
| Graphics                               | Intel Integrated Graphics (DirectX 9 compatible)                                      |
| Display                                | 1366 x 768                                                                            |
| Network                                | Gigabit                                                                               |
| Pointing Device                        | Multi-touch Projected Capacitive touch screen                                         |
| **Performance Data (Advancec POS UI)** |                                                                                       |
| CPU Benchmark Score                    | 4015                                                                                  |
| Minimum Keystroke Delay                | 150 m/s                                                                               |
| Maximum Keys per Second                | 6.67                                                                                  |
| Maximum Keys per Minute                | 400                                                                                   |

### System #5 Conclusion

The Core i3 desktop CPU and 8Gb of RAM made all the difference with this system, doubling the HTML POS performance compared to previous systems tested. At 400 keystrokes per minute, this system now surpasses the capacity of even the most experienced typists.

***

### System #6: Old Desktop PC

This system is a standard desktop PC manufactured in 2011, which was upgraded to Windows 10.

| System #6: Old Desktop PC              |                                                                                       |
| -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Operating System                       | Microsoft Windows 10 Pro, Version 1903, 64-bit Edition                                |
| CPU                                    | Intel Core i7-2600 (Quad-Core @ 3.40Ghz, "Sandy Bridge" Desktop CPU, Released Q1-2011 |
| RAM                                    | 8Gb                                                                                   |
| Storage                                | 512Gb SATA SSD                                                                        |
| Graphics                               | Intel Integrated Graphics (DirectX 9 compatible)                                      |
| Display                                | 1920 x 1080                                                                           |
| Network                                | Gigabit                                                                               |
| Pointing Device                        | Mouse                                                                                 |
| **Performance Data (Advancec POS UI)** |                                                                                       |
| CPU Benchmark Score                    | 8185                                                                                  |
| Minimum Keystroke Delay                | 100 m/s                                                                               |
| Maximum Keys per Second                | 10                                                                                    |
| Maximum Keys per Minute                | 600                                                                                   |

### System #6 Conclusion

While a full-sized desktop computer does not necessarily make sense to use as a POS, this hardware was included here as a point of comparison, and to show that old hardware can still be used very efficiently. Also, similar hardware is available in Small Form Factor (SFF), which has a much smaller footprint.

***

### System #7: High-End Desktop PC

This system is a high-end, Small Form Factor (SFF) desktop PC, running Windows 10 pro and manufactured in 2018.

| System #7: High-End Desktop PC         |                                                                                   |
| -------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Operating System                       | Microsoft Windows 10 Pro, Version 1903, 64-bit Edition                            |
| CPU                                    | Intel Core i7-8700 (6-Core @ 3.20Ghz, "Coffee Lake" Desktop CPU, Released Q4-2017 |
| RAM                                    | 32Gb                                                                              |
| Storage                                | 512Gb NVMe SSD                                                                    |
| Graphics                               | Intel Integrated Graphics (DirectX 11 compatible)                                 |
| Display                                | 1920 x 1080                                                                       |
| Network                                | Gigabit                                                                           |
| Pointing Device                        | Mouse                                                                             |
| **Performance Data (Advancec POS UI)** |                                                                                   |
| CPU Benchmark Score                    | 15140                                                                             |
| Minimum Keystroke Delay                | 50 m/s                                                                            |
| Maximum Keys per Second                | 20                                                                                |
| Maximum Keys per Minute                | 1200                                                                              |

### System #7 Conclusion

A SFF PC such as this one has a relatively small footprint. Coupled with a touch screen, this could effectively run the entire Maitre'D Back-Office suite along with HTML POS as a local workstation without any noticeable drop in performance.


# Operating System Requirements

### Operating System Requirements

Maitre'D is designed for the Microsoft Windows environment and will operate on both 32-bit (x86) and 64-bit (x64) editions of current Windows operating systems. This makes Maitre'D "hardware-agnostic", which means it will work on any hardware that can run Microsoft Windows, as long as it meets the minimum performance requirements.

The table below lists all currently supported operating systems with their projected End-of-Life date issued by Microsoft.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Operating systems that have reached their End-of-Life are not listed here, as PayFacto cannot guarantee reliable operation with deprecated operating systems.

&#x20;

While some deprecated operating systems may still work with Maitre'D, they are no longer supported by Microsoft and therefore no longer receive security updates.

&#x20;

As such, deprecated operating systems represent a liability which may compromise the POS system's security.
{% endhint %}

***

### Desktop Operating Systems

| Name                                      | Suitable for: | <p>Support Status</p><p>(PayFacto)</p> | <p>End-of-Life</p><p>(Microsoft)</p> |           |                  |
| ----------------------------------------- | ------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ | --------- | ---------------- |
| Back-Office                               | POS           | Backup / Auxiliary                     |                                      |           |                  |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Pro                  | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | October 14, 2025 |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Pro for Workstations | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | October 14, 2025 |
| Microsoft Windows 11 Pro                  | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | N/A              |
| Microsoft Windows 11 Pro for Workstations | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | N/A              |

***

### Patch levels for Desktop Operating Systems

In addition to the general End-of-Life date issued for Desktop operating systems, Microsoft also issues End-of-Life dates for specific patch levels. This is done by Microsoft to ensure that users keep their operating systems up-to-date.

| Name                                                            | <p>Support Status</p><p>(PayFacto)</p> | <p>End-of-Life</p><p>(Microsoft)</p> |
| --------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ |
|                                                                 |                                        |                                      |
| Microsoft Windows 10 (Pro & Pro for Workstations), version 20H2 | Supported                              | May 10, 2022                         |
| Microsoft Windows 10 (Pro & Pro for Workstations), version 21H1 | Supported                              | December 13, 2022                    |
| Microsoft Windows 10 (Pro & Pro for Workstations), version 21H2 | Supported                              | June 13, 2023                        |
| Microsoft Windows 11 (Pro & Pro for Workstations), version 21H2 | Supported                              | October 10, 2023                     |

***

### Server-oriented Operating Systems

| Name                             | Suitable for: | <p>Support Status</p><p>(PayFacto)</p> | <p>End-of-Life</p><p>(Microsoft)</p> |           |                  |
| -------------------------------- | ------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ | --------- | ---------------- |
| Back-Office                      | POS           | Backup / Auxiliary                     |                                      |           |                  |
| Microsoft Windows Server 2012    | YES           | NO\*                                   | NO\*                                 | Supported | October 10, 2023 |
| Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 | YES           | NO\*                                   | NO\*                                 | Supported | October 10, 2023 |
| Microsoft Windows Server 2016    | YES           | NO\*                                   | NO\*                                 | Supported | January 12, 2027 |
| Microsoft Windows Server 2019    | YES           | NO\*                                   | NO\*                                 | Supported | January 9, 2029  |
| Microsoft Windows Server 2022    | YES           | NO\*                                   | NO\*                                 | Supported | October 14, 2031 |

* While a POS, Backup Server or Auxiliary Back-Office would work perfectly on a server-oriented operating system, PayFacto does not recommend doing so, unless your operations specifically requires this.

***

### Embedded and "Internet of Things" (IoT) Operating Systems

| Name                                              | Suitable for: | <p>Support Status</p><p>(PayFacto)</p> | <p>End-of-Life</p><p>(Microsoft)</p> |           |                  |
| ------------------------------------------------- | ------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ | --------- | ---------------- |
| Back-Office                                       | POS           | Backup / Auxiliary                     |                                      |           |                  |
| Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2015     | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | October 13, 2025 |
| Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSB 2016     | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | October 12, 2026 |
| Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSC 2019     | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | January 8, 2029  |
| Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Enterprise LTSC 2021     | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | January 12, 2032 |
| Microsoft Windows 11 IoT Enterprise, version 21H2 | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | October 8, 2024  |

***

### Enterprise Operating Systems

| Name                                          | Suitable for: | <p>Support Status</p><p>(PayFacto)</p> | <p>End-of-Life</p><p>(Microsoft)</p> |           |                    |
| --------------------------------------------- | ------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ | --------- | ------------------ |
| Back-Office                                   | POS           | Backup / Auxiliary                     |                                      |           |                    |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise LTSB 2015     | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | October 13, 2025   |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise LTSB 2016     | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | October 12, 2026   |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC 2019     | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | January 8, 2029    |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC 2021     | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | January 12, 2027\* |
| Microsoft Windows 11 Enterprise, version 21H2 | YES           | YES                                    | YES                                  | Supported | October 8, 2024    |

\* Microsoft lists this date as the end of "Mainstream support" for this Windows version.  Mainstream support is typically followed by an extended support period, however it is not listed on the Microsoft Lifecycle site at this time.&#x20;

***

### Windows 11

Microsoft Windows 11 is the latest release of the Windows family of operating systems. It was released on October 5th, 2021. A full test suite has been run on PayFacto's POS products to ensure compatibility.

#### Windows 11 vs. Microsoft lifecycle

At this time, Microsoft has not issued official end-of-life (EOL) dates for the Windows 11 family of products. The only EOL dates available so far are for patch levels. These dates will be updated when Microsoft releases new feature updates for Windows 11.


# Unsupported Operating Systems

### End-of-Life products

Once a Microsoft operating system (OS) reaches the end of support, customers will no longer receive security updates. The OS may still work with programs and hardware after the sale or support of the operating system has been discontinued. However, the possibility increases that new programs and hardware will not be performant on an older OS. This frequently occurs because the manufacturers of new hardware and software make product-design decisions that take advantage of the increased functionality and features in newer operating systems. These manufacturers may decide to discontinue support of their products on older operating systems as appropriate.

For Maitre'D, this means that the POS system will continue to work after the end of support. However, as updates and features are added to Maitre'D after EOL, the possibility increases that new Maitre'D releases become incompatible with older operating systems. Furthermore, deprecated operating systems represent a liability which may compromise the entire POS system's security.

For more information, please see:

[Microsoft Windows Lifecycle FAQ](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/lifecycle/faq/windows)

***

### End-of-Life products vs. PCI-DSS

Any system using an unsupported or deprecated operating system automatically falls out of PCI-DSS compliance due to the inability of such systems to meet PCI-DSS Requirement 6.2.

#### **PCI-DSS Requirement 6.2 states:**

{% hint style="info" %}
“Ensure that all system components and software are protected from known vulnerabilities by installing applicable vendor supplied security patches. Install critical security patches within one month of release.”
{% endhint %}

***

### Unsupported products

Some operating systems are not supported by PayFacto even though they are still supported by Microsoft. These can be divided in two categories:

#### Failed products

Some operating systems never received wide market adoption, such that PayFacto never deemed necessary or profitable to perform any kind of testing on these products. While these operating systems may work with Maitre'D, PayFacto cannot provide any form of guarantee to that effect, as they were never tested. Such products include Microsoft Windows Vista (which is now also EOL) and Microsoft Windows 8 / 8.1.

#### Consumer products

Microsoft publishes a wide array of Windows editions targeted for home users, educational versions for schools and other specialized versions for niche users. These versions of windows are not supported due to the lack of certain key features, or because of the Microsoft End-User License Agreement (EULA), which may not cover commercial or industrial use cases.

***

### Full list of Unsupported and End-of-Life Operating Systems

| Name                                                  | <p>Support Status</p><p>(PayFacto)</p> | <p>End-of-Life</p><p>(Microsoft)</p> |
| ----------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ |
|                                                       |                                        |                                      |
| Microsoft Windows 95                                  | UNSUPPORTED                            | December 31, 2001                    |
| Microsoft Windows NT                                  | UNSUPPORTED                            | December 31, 2004                    |
| Microsoft Windows 98                                  | UNSUPPORTED                            | July 11, 2006                        |
| Microsoft Windows 98 SE                               | UNSUPPORTED                            | July 11, 2006                        |
| Microsoft Windows millennium Edition                  | UNSUPPORTED                            | July 11, 2006                        |
| Microsoft Windows 2000                                | UNSUPPORTED                            | July 13, 2010                        |
| Microsoft Windows XP (ALL EDITIONS)                   | UNSUPPORTED                            | April 8, 2014                        |
| Windows Embedded for Point of Service (WEPOS) 1.x SP3 | UNSUPPORTED                            | April 12, 2016                       |
| Microsoft Windows Vista (ALL EDITIONS)                | UNSUPPORTED                            | April 11, 2017                       |
| Windows Embedded POS Ready 2009                       | UNSUPPORTED                            | April 9, 2019                        |
| Microsoft Windows 7 Starter                           | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 14, 2020                     |
| Microsoft Windows 7 Home Basic                        | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 14, 2020                     |
| Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium                      | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 14, 2020                     |
| Microsoft Windows 7 Professional                      | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 14, 2020                     |
| Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise                        | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 14, 2020                     |
| Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate                          | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 14, 2020                     |
| Microsoft Windows POSReady 7                          | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 12, 2021                     |
| Microsoft Windows 8 (ALL EDITIONS)                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 10, 2023                     |
| Microsoft Windows 8.1 (ALL EDITIONS)                  | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 10, 2023                     |
| Microsoft Windows 8 Core                              | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 10, 2023                     |
| Microsoft Windows "RT"                                | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 10, 2023                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Home                             | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 14, 2025                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Education                        | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 14, 2025                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Pro Education                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 14, 2025                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10 IoT Core                         | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 14, 2025                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Mobile                           | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 14, 2025                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Mobile Enterprise                | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 14, 2025                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10 Team                             | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 14, 2025                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10 "X"                              | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 14, 2025                     |
| Microsoft Windows 2000 Server                         | UNSUPPORTED                            | July 13, 2010                        |
| Microsoft Windows Server 2003                         | UNSUPPORTED                            | July 14, 2015                        |
| Microsoft Windows Server 2008                         | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 14, 2020                     |
| Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2                      | UNSUPPORTED                            | January 14, 2020                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 1507                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | May 9, 2017                          |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 1511                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 10, 2017                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 1607                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | April 9, 2019                        |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 1703                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 8, 2019                      |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 1709                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | April 14, 2020                       |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 1803                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | November 10, 2020                    |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 1809                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | November 10, 2020                    |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 1903                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | December 8, 2020                     |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 1909                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | May 11, 2021                         |
| Microsoft Windows 10, version 2004                    | UNSUPPORTED                            | December 14, 2021                    |
| Microsoft Windows 11 Home, version 21H2               | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 10, 2023                     |
| Microsoft Windows 11 Education, version 21H2          | UNSUPPORTED                            | October 8, 2024                      |


# Software Requirements

## Software Requirements

Software requirements are applications, drivers or libraries which may not be included with the operating system by default.

***

### Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 or later

Microsoft .NET framework 3.5 is included with the Maitre'D installation program. It will be installed automatically if the Install Shield Wizard does not detect it on your system.

***

### Microsoft Windows Installer 4.5 or later

Windows 10 already has a more recent version of Windows Installer, but version 4.5 is still supplied with the Maitre'D installation program in case there is a need to install Maitre'D on an earlier operating system which could have an earlier version of Windows Installer.

***

### Java for Windows (formerly Java Runtime Environment (JRE))

While it is optional for Maitre'D itself, Java for Windows is required with some Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT) payment solutions like SecureTable and SecurePay. This is also often required by third-party vendors for specific applications. This component needs to be downloaded and installed manually from the Java website.

It can be downloaded and installed from here: <https://www.java.com/en/>

***

### Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 or later

For operating systems prior to Windows 10, this would be supplied through Windows Updates. Since Windows 10, Internet Explorer is bundled with the operating system. It does not need to be the default browser.

***

### All available Windows Updates for your operating system

Your operating system needs to be kept up-to-date with all the latest updates. This will ensure that all critical and security-related updates are installed and will help maintain PCI-DSS compliance.

***

### Anti-Virus / Anti-Malware

Install a reputable anti-virus and anti-malware solution on the PC. The Anti-Virus / Anti-Malware solution needs to be fully operational at all times and maintained with the latest updates and virus definitions. PayFacto does not recommend any brand in particular. However, while Microsoft's Windows Defender solution is free, bundled with Windows and works in most cases, we do recommend using a reputable, independently branded and well reviewed product.

This is a critical component of the Maitre’D system’s security and a requirement for PCI-DSS compliance.

***

### Firewall

In addition to the perimeter firewall which protects your network, a software firewall needs to be installed on the main Back-Office PC as well as all POS workstations. The Windows Defender Firewall is adequate for most installations.

This is a critical component of the Maitre’D system’s security and a requirement for PCI-DSS compliance.


# Chap 2: Installation & Initial Setup

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Preparation</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/29I3JFsqWbh9UEQ0gtem">/pages/29I3JFsqWbh9UEQ0gtem</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Installation</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/qZiN7OO9wl0JOho8Yfjq">/pages/qZiN7OO9wl0JOho8Yfjq</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>License Activation</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/e49PzLjNI8ojkUhbEP7n">/pages/e49PzLjNI8ojkUhbEP7n</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>First Login</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/CKMMlZih9LRf37l5AdJi">/pages/CKMMlZih9LRf37l5AdJi</a></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Preparation

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Before Installing Maitre'D</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/LxHgOf7GUerkMJHjapKE">/pages/LxHgOf7GUerkMJHjapKE</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Configure your Windows Network Profile</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/1t5badgtExsBZQVYeLmJ">/pages/1t5badgtExsBZQVYeLmJ</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Download Maitre'D Setup Files</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/L91HA5SiI0TjoqcMjw0g">/pages/L91HA5SiI0TjoqcMjw0g</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Creat your own Custom Maitre'D Installer</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/JhojrISlvKQkr55rGY6H">/pages/JhojrISlvKQkr55rGY6H</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Before Installing Maitre'D

### Prepare Maitre’D Back-Office Server PC

Prior to installing Maitre’D, the computer’s hard drive must be properly formatted and partitioned, and a compatible version of Microsoft Windows® needs to be installed. For instruction on formatting and partitioning the hard disk and installing Microsoft Windows®, please refer to Microsoft Windows® documentation or to the documentation provided by your computer's manufacturer.

This manual explains the installation for the Maitre’D software on the Microsoft Windows 10 operating system with Microsoft Network. Maitre’D can be installed on any networking system that uses or emulates the TCP/IP communication protocol. Please refer to the appropriate documentation for more information.

***

### Install all available Windows Updates for your operating system

Your operating system needs to be kept up-to-date with all the latest updates. This will ensure that all critical and security-related updates are installed and will help maintain PCI-DSS compliance.

***

### Enable Windows User Account Control (UAC)

Most recent Windows operating systems use a feature called User Account Control or UAC . This feature exists to improve the operating system's security by preventing some types of applications to run without the user's knowledge. Make sure that this feature is activated and set to the default (recommended) level before installing Maitre’D. Using UAC is required to maintain PCI-DSS compliance and to ensure basic safety of the system.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! In Windows 10, disabling UAC through registry hacks or Group Policy Objects (GPOs) will cause some operating system features to stop working correctly, in addition to compromize the system's overall security. Also, installing any software in a “non-UAC” environment and re-enabling UAC afterwards WILL cause issues. For instance, automatic End of Day may not work, or you may be unable to start or stop the Maitre’D Back-Office server from the Server Control module. Other unforeseen and unwanted side effects may also occur.
{% endhint %}

***

### Enable Windows Smart Screen

Starting with Windows 10, Windows Smart Screen is an integral part of the operating system. This feature is active by default and needs to remain active in order to ensure basic safety of the system and maintain PCI-DSS compliance.

***

### Anti-Virus / Anti-Malware

Install a reputable anti-virus and anti-malware solution on the PC. The Anti-Virus / Anti-Malware solution needs to be fully operational at all times and maintained with the latest updates and virus definitions. It needs to be installed on the main Back-Office PC as well as all POS workstations, Auxiliary Back-Office and Backup Servers. PayFacto does not recommend any brand in particular. However, while Microsoft's Windows Defender solution is free, bundled with Windows and works in most cases, we do recommend using a reputable, independently branded and well reviewed product.

This is a critical component of the Maitre’D system’s security and a requirement for PCI-DSS compliance.

***

### Firewall

In addition to the perimeter firewall which protects your network, a software firewall needs to be installed on the main Back-Office PC as well as all POS workstations, Auxiliary Back-Office and Backup Servers. The Windows Defender Firewall is adequate for most installations.

This is a critical component of the Maitre’D system’s security and a requirement for PCI-DSS compliance.

***

### POS Workstations

POS Workstations are generally pre-configured with an appropriate version of Microsoft Windows. Like the Maitre’D Back-Office Server PC, make sure to:

* Install all Windows Updates.
* Ensure that UAC is enabled and set to the default level.
* Ensure that Windows Smart Screen is enabled.
* Install, update and maintain a reputable anti-virus / anti-malware solution.
* Install, update and maintain a reputable software firewall.

***

### TCP/IP network

Make sure that the TCP/IP network is properly configured so that the Maitre’D Back-Office Server PC and all POS workstations can communicate with each other.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! With Windows 10, Network Discovery and File & Printer sharing  are disabled by default. Password Protected Sharing is enabled. These default settings may prevent Maitre'D from working correctly. See how to correctly configure these settings in this topic: [Configure your Windows Network Profile](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/preparation/configure-your-windows-network-profile)
{% endhint %}


# Configure your Windows Network Profile

### Configure your Windows Network Profile

The Network Profile feature was introduced with Windows Vista and was carried over to later versions of Microsoft Windows. In Windows 10, the default Network Profile settings will prevent Maitre'D from working correctly by disabling File & Printer sharing and forcing Password Protected Sharing. This topic explains how to configure these settings to allow Maitre'D to operate normally.

***

### Change Network Profile from "Public" to "Private" or "Domain"

By default, on a new Windows 10 installation, your Network Profile will be set to "Public". This is the most secure setting, and is intended for use on public networks, such as public WiFi provided at airports, coffee shops, etc. This setting will "hide" the PC from other devices on the network, which will cause issues with Maitre'D. This profile also hides settings that need to be enabled for Maitre'D to work correctly. This needs to be changed to either Private or Domain.

#### Procedure

1. In the Windows Notification area, click on the Network Connection icon, then click on the network connection you wish to configure. (there could be more than one.)

![Notification Area](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/01-SystemTray.png)

2. This will bring up basic settings. Click on the Network connection (again).

![Ethernet - Basic Settings](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/02-NetworkSettings.png)

3. The Network profile options will be displayed. Select either Private or Domain.

![Network Profile Selection](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/03-SetPrivate.png)

#### Domain or Private Network Profile, which one to select?

If your Maitre'D Main Back-Office PC is part of an Active Directory Domain, your Network Profile needs to be set to "Domain". If the PC is not on a domain, this option will not be available, therefore your Network Profile needs to be set to "Private".

If you believe that the PC should be using the Domain Network Profile but this option is not available, please ask your network administrator for advice.

***

### Change Network Profile Options

1. Just like before, in the Windows Notification area, click on the Network Connection icon, then click on the network connection you wish to configure. (there could be more than one.)

![Notification Area](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/01-SystemTray.png)

2. This will bring up basic settings. This time, click Change advanced sharing options.

![Ethernet - Basic Settings](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/04-ChangeAdvancedSharingSettings.png)

3. Under the Private (or domain) profile, make sure that:

a. Turn on network discovery is selected.

b. Turn on file and printer sharing is selected.

![Private Network Profile Options](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/05-PrivateProfileOptions.png)

4. Click on the down-arrow next to All Networks. This will display more options.
5. Scroll down to the Password Protected Sharing section and select Turn off password protected sharing.

![Common Network Profile Options](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/06-TurnOffPasswordProtectedSharing.png)

6. Click Save changes.

This configuration needs to be done on the Main Back-Office PC, all Auxiliary Back-Office and Backup Server PCs, as well as on all POS workstations.

***

### Test Connectivity

The connectivity between the Main Maitre'D Back-Office PC and other components of the Maitre'D network can easily be tested. For the example below, we are testing connectivity to a PC named "MAIN-BACK-OFFICE".

1. From any PC or POS on the Maitre'D network, right-click the Windows Start button and select Run...

![Right-Click Windows Start Menu](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/10-Right-Click-Run.png)

2. In the Run... box, type two back-slashes (\\\\) followed by the name of the PC you want to connect to. For example:

\\\MAIN-BACK-OFFICE&#x20;

![Windows Run Dialog](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/11-RunBox.png)

3. Click OK.

a. If the Maitre'D Back-Office is already installed, you will see the MaitreD shared folder on the PC named MAIN-BACK-OFFICE.

![Remote PC with shared folder](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/08-SharedFolder.png)

b. If the Maitre'D Back-Office is not yet installed, you will see an empty folder on the PC named MAIN-BACK-OFFICE.

![Remote PC with empty folder](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/09-EmptyFolder.png)

c. If the network settings are not configured properly, you will see an error message.

![Error message accessing remote PC](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/NetworkProfile/07-Error.png)

The network settings now allow communication between all the components of the Maitre'D Network.


# Download Maitre'D Setup Files

### Download Maitre'D Setup Files

To be able to download files for the Maitre'D POS system, you need a distributor account. Please contact your sales representative to obtain an account if you don't already have one.

***

### Logon to the Maitre'D Distributor Portal

1. Logon to:

   <http://distributors.maitredpos.com/>
2. Select your language.
3. Enter your username and password.
4. Click the Login button.

***

### Access the Software Downloads Section

1. Click the Support link, either at the very top of the page or in the main body.

![Screenshot - Distributor Portal](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDDownload/01-ClickSupport.png)

2. Click Knowledge Base. (You may need to scroll down a bit) This will open a new browser window.

![Screenshot - Distributor Portal](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDDownload/02-ClickKB.png)

3. Click the Knowledge Base tile.

![KB Tile](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDDownload/03-KBTile.png)

4. Click the Software Downloads tile.

![Software Downloads Tile](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDDownload/04-SoftDLTile.png)

5. Click the Maitre'D 7 Back-Office Suite Downloads link.

![Screenshot - Software Downloads](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDDownload/05-DowloadsLink.png)

***

### Download the file(s) you need

For Maitre'D 7, there are 3 downloads:

#### Service Pack Update

Download this file if Maitre'D is already installed and needs to be upgraded to the latest version.

![Maitre'D Update Download](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDDownload/06-SPUpdate.png)

#### Maitre'D Back-Office Full Install

Download this file to install Maitre'D from scratch on a new system. Includes Service Pack Update 7.08.000.180.

![Maitre'D Back-Office Full Install Download](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDDownload/07-FullBO.png)

#### Maitre'D Back-Office DVD

Download this file to have the full contents of the original Maitre'D DVD, which includes the Maitre'D Back-Office Full Install, with a graphical user interface to facilitate the installation of backup and auxiliary servers, POS workstations, etc.

![Maitre'D Back-Office DVD Download](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDDownload/08-FullDVD.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Downloaded files are \*.zip archives that need to be extracted for the installation to work. Please see [Extracting Files](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/preparation/create-your-own-custom-maitred-installer)
{% endhint %}

Related Topics

1. [Create your own Custom Maitre'D Installer](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/preparation/create-your-own-custom-maitred-installer)
2. [Installation Process for the Maitre'D Back-Office](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/installation-process-for-the-maitred-back-office)
3. [Installation Process for the Maitre'D Point of Sale](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/installation-process-for-the-maitred-point-of-sale)
4. [Installation Process for the Maitre'D Backup Server](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/installation-process-for-the-maitred-backup-server)
5. [InstallationProcessAuxiliaryBack-Office](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/Chap02_MaitreD_Install/InstallationProcessAuxiliaryBack-Office.htm)


# Create your own Custom Maitre'D Installer

### Create your own Custom Maitre'D Installer

To save some time during the installation of a new Maitre'D POS system, a custom installer set can easily be created with the latest service pack update. This way, Maitre'D will be installed and updated to the latest version in one single operation.

***

### Step 1: Download files

Custom installers can be created from the Maitre'D DVD or the Back-Office full install. Download the one you want (or both), and also download the latest service pack update.

Instructions to download files are provided here:

[Download Maitre'D Setup Files](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/preparation/download-maitred-setup-files)

***

### Step 2: Extract Files

The files downloaded from the Distributor portal are \*.zip files that need to be extracted before they can be used. Fortunately, even a "vanilla" Windows 10 installation has the necessary tools to work with \*.zip files.

1. Copy downloaded files to your Windows Desktop.
2. Right-Click the file you wish to extract, and select the Extract All... option.

![Screenshot - Extract All](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/01-ExtractAll.png)

3. By default, the Windows Zip extraction tool will create a folder with the same name as the Zip file where files will be extracted. Don't change anything and simply click the Extract button. (Don't worry, the original \*.zip file will NOT be overwritten).

<figure><img src="/files/rYX26CkJJRjAOtwNAHea" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

4. A new folder will be created to store all the extracted files. You may see a progress bar while large files are being extracted.

![Extraction Progress Bar](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/03-Progress.png)

5. The folder where files were extracted will open automatically for you. You can minimize it to the task bar. We'll be using this later.

Repeat this process for all 3 downloaded files:

* MDBO708000DVD.zip (Maitre'D DVD)
* MDBO708000BO.zip (Maitre'D Back-Office Full Install)
* MDBO708000xxx.zip (Service Pack update, where "xxx" is the Service Pack version number)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: If you use a third-party archiving tool to extract files, please refer to the documentation provided with your tool of choice.
{% endhint %}

***

### Step 3: Copy the Service Pack File

Now that all files were extracted, we need to copy the latest service pack update in the installer sets.

#### Maitre'D DVD

1. Open the MDBO708000xxx folder, then right-click the  MDBO708000xxx.exe file and select Copy.

![Screenshot - Copy](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/04-Copy.png)

2. Open the MDBO708000DVD folder, then browse to the \bo\Disk1\ subfolder.
3. Right-click in an empty space within the folder and select the Paste option.

![Screenshot - Paste](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/05-Paste.png)

4. The file will be copied.
5. Copy the contents of the MDBO708000DVD folder to the root of a removable media, such as a DVD-ROM or a USB thumb drive.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! The files must be copied at the root of the removable media (DVD-ROM or USB Thumb drive). If the files are inside a sub-folder, the links provided in the autorun program will not work, and you will get error messages when attempting to install applications.
{% endhint %}

**Installer files are located at the root of the E:\ drive.**

**This installer will work.**

![Installer Working](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/06-CustomDVDWorking.png)

&#x20;

**Installer files are located inside a folder, in E:\MDBO708000DVD.**

**This installer will NOT work.**

![Installer Not Working](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/07-CustomDVDNotWorking.png)

#### Maitre'D Back-Office full Install

1. Open the MDBO708000xxx folder, then right-click the  MDBO708000xxx.exe file and select Copy.

![Screenshot - Copy](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/04-Copy.png)

2. Open the MDBO708000BO folder, then browse to the \Disk1\ subfolder.
3. Right-click in an empty space within the folder and select the Paste option.

![Screenshot - Paste](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/05-Paste.png)

4. The file will be copied.

***

### Step 4: Use the installer

The installers are now ready to be used. With the service pack update file copied to the installer folder, the installer will automatically detect that an update is available and prompt for its installation during the Maitre'D setup process.

You can run the Maitre'D Back-Office installation program straight from your desktop. However, it is recommended to copy the install set(s) to  removable media, such as a portable hard drive, DVD-ROM or USB thumb drive.&#x20;

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! The DVD Installer files MUST be copied to the root of a removable media (DVD-ROM or USB Thumb Drive) to work correctly. The Autorun installer will not work if the files are located in a sub-folder.
{% endhint %}


# Installation

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Start the Installation from a DVD (for downloaded DVD Files)</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/IzQ7lCtwbxvPVRi3tdp2">/pages/IzQ7lCtwbxvPVRi3tdp2</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Start the Installation from Downloaded Files</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/2niaD53Zxi8RlZ3myyqR">/pages/2niaD53Zxi8RlZ3myyqR</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Installation Process for the Maitre'D Back-Office</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/bVnAUYD0YvCA9H0MbuZy">/pages/bVnAUYD0YvCA9H0MbuZy</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Installation Process for the Maitre'D Point of Sale</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/EDalOwb8aD1EobuhsQSO">/pages/EDalOwb8aD1EobuhsQSO</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Installation Process for the Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office </td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/tOo0DBWlkcpCtITFaR4X">/pages/tOo0DBWlkcpCtITFaR4X</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Installation Process for the Maitre'D Backup Server</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/xuqjuFq3TIxjMrpl3mgU">/pages/xuqjuFq3TIxjMrpl3mgU</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Start the Installation from a DVD (or downloaded DVD files)

### Start the Installation from a DVD (or downloaded DVD files)

Originally, the Maitre'D installer was shipped on a physical DVD. Being fully aware that many recent laptops and even full-sized desktop computers are no longer shipped with optical drives, and also to reduce e-waste and shipping costs, the files are available for download from the Maitre'D Distributor Portal.

Please see:

[Download Maitre'D Setup Files](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/preparation/download-maitred-setup-files)

***

### To start the Maitre’D Advanced Restaurant Suite Setup:

#### Physical DVD ROM:

1. Insert the DVD in the DVD-ROM drive.
2. The disk should auto-play.

#### **If AutoPlay doesn't start:**

1. Use File Explorer to browse your DVD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click Autorun.exe.

#### Downloaded DVD files:

1. Copy all the DVD files to the root of a removable media, such as a USB thumb drive.
2. Use File Explorer to browse the removable media.
3. Double-click Autorun.exe.

***

### Maitre'D Advanced Restaurant Suite Setup

As the Autorun tool starts, you may see a Windows User Account Control (UAC) message. Click Yes.

![UAC Warning](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/01-UAC.png)

The first installer screen will be displayed:

![Autorun Screen 1](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/02-Installer1.png)

#### Run Demo Tour

Select the option to take a tour of Maitre'D.

#### Install Back-Office and Point of Sale

Select this option to install the Maitre'D Back-Office Server, Backup Server, Auxiliary Server or Point of Sale software. This will open another menu page with all necessary installation options.

#### Install Maitre'D e-Global and DataBoard

Select this option to install the Maitre'D e-Global solution. This will open another menu page with all necessary installation options.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! The DataBoard option listed here is obsolete. Please consult up-to-date DataBoard documentation and installation instructions here:

&#x20;

[DataBoard v3 with mobile application](https://documentation.payfacto.com/download/MaitreD/DataBoard/DataBoard%203.1.240.27436%20-%20December%202021%20Release.pdf)
{% endhint %}

#### Contacts

Select this option to view contact information.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! This will display old Posera contact Information. Please contact PayFacto instead. View up-to-date contact information here:

&#x20;

[PayFacto Contact Information](https://payfacto.com/contact/)
{% endhint %}

#### Exit

Select this option to exit from the installer.

***

### Install Back-Office and Point of Sale sub-menu

![Autorun Screen 2](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/03-Installer2.png)

#### Install Main Back-Office

Select this option to install the Maitre'D Main Back-Office server software.

The Maitre'D Back-Office needs to be installed prior to any other Maitre'D application. After a successful installation, you will be able to proceed with the installation of the Point of Sale application, and any other software required, such as the Auxiliary Back-Office or Backup Server.

#### Install Auxiliary Back-Office

Select this option to install a Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office.

Install this program if you want access to the Maitre'D Back-Office software, with multi-user capability, from any other computer on the Maitre'D network. This program needs to be installed on each computer that you want to access the Back-Office from.

#### Install Backup Server

Select this option to install a Maitre'D Backup Server.

The Backup Server will provide additional security to your network by including full redundancy of the Maitre'D Back-Office software on any Point of Sale workstation  or any other computer in your network.

#### Install Windows Point of Sale

Select this option to install the Maitre'D Point of Sale software on a workstation.

The Maitre'D Point of Sale provides you with every function needed in the restaurant industry. Table management, QSR, Delivery, Take-out, Drive-Thru and more. The Point of Sale software can be installed on a wide variety of hardware and supports several devices such as: Printers, scanners, scales, coin dispensers, liquor control systems, etc.

#### Back

Select this option to return to the previous screen.

To start the installation of the Maitre'D Back-Office, select the first option: Install Main Back-Office. This will launch the Maitre'D Back-Office InstallShield Wizard.

***

### Install Maitre'D e-Global and DataBoard sub-menu

<figure><img src="/files/Dmiueh44ubIdHuWtRRLF" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Install Maitre'D e-Global Solution

Select this option to install the Maitre'D e-Global Solution.

The Maitre'D e-Global corporate solution is a powerful package developed to bring increased efficiency to multi-unit food service corporations. It allows them to receive data from all units at the frequency they desire. e-Global also allows them to manage each unit's database remotely, providing more control over menus, promotions and prices.

#### Install Maitre'D DataBoard WEB Server

Do not use this option, as this version of DataBoard is now obsolete.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! The DataBoard option listed here is obsolete. Please consult up-to-date DataBoard documentation and installation instructions here:

&#x20;

[DataBoard v3 with mobile application](https://documentation.payfacto.com/download/MaitreD/DataBoard/DataBoard%203.1.240.27436%20-%20December%202021%20Release.pdf)
{% endhint %}


# Start the Installation from Downloaded Files

### Start the Installation from Downloaded Files

Using downloaded files is the quickest way to get a system up and running. However, it gets a bit tricky if you need to install an auxiliary or backup server. These matters will be covered here.

Before you begin, we highly recommend downloading the latest installer and service pack, and creating your own install set. This will allow you to install Maitre'D and get it updated to the latest version in one single operation.

Please see:

[Download Maitre'D Setup Files](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/preparation/download-maitred-setup-files)

[Create a custom Maitre'D Installer](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/preparation/create-your-own-custom-maitred-installer)

***

#### Start the Installation for the Maitre'D Back-Office

1. Make sure the installer files are extracted, either on you local hard drive or on a removable media. Installation will not work if the files are still within a \*.zip archive. (See [Extracting Files](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/preparation/create-your-own-custom-maitred-installer))
2. Using Windows File Explorer, browse to the folder containing  the install files.
3. Locate the file called Setup.exe and double-click on it.
4. You may get a UAC warning. Click Yes.

![UAC Warning - Maitre'D Installer](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/14-UAC\(MD\).png)

5. The Maitre'D Back-Office InstallShield wizard will start.
6. Follow the steps described in [Installation Process for the Maitre'D Back-Office](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/installation-process-for-the-maitred-back-office).

***

### Start the Installation Process for a Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office

1. Extract the installation files on you local hard drive. We will be using the command prompt, so to make your life easier, you can copy the files in a folder at the root of the C:\ drive. For this example, we copied the install files to a folder called MD\_Install, at the root of the C:\ drive.

![Installer Files Folder](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/08-MD_InstallFolder.png)

2. Open an elevated command prompt by clicking the Windows Start menu and typing "CMD". Select the Run as Administrator option.

![Windows Start Menu - Command Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/09-StartCMD.png)

You may get a UAC warning. Click Yes.>

![UAC Warning - Command Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/09-UAC_CMD.png)

3. The command prompt will open at the C:\Windows\System32> prompt. Jump to the root of the C:\ drive by typing the following command:

cd\ \[ENTER]

![Command Prompt - Jump to root of C:\\](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/10-CMD1.png)

4. navigate to the MD\_Install folder by typing the following command at the C:\\> prompt:

cd md\_install \[ENTER]

![Command Prompt - Change Directory](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/11-CMD2.png)

5. The prompt will not look like this: C:\MD\_Install>. Start the Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office setup by typing the following command:

setup.exe aux \[ENTER]

![Command Prompt - Start Auxiliary Install](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/12-CMD_AUX.png)

1. The installation process will start. Follow the steps as outlined in the [Installation Process for the Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/installation-process-for-the-maitred-auxiliary-back-office).

***

### Start the Installation Process for a Maitre'D Backup Server

1. Repeat steps 1 through 5 of the Auxiliary Back-Office setup above.
2. The prompt will not look like this: C:\MD\_Install>. Start the Maitre'D Backup Server setup by typing the following command:

   setup.exe backup \[ENTER]

![Command Prompt - Start Backup Install](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDCustomInstall/13-CMD_BACKUP.png)

3. The installation process will start. Follow the steps as outlined in the [Installation Process for the Maitre'D Backup Server](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/installation-process-for-the-maitred-backup-server).

Related Topics

1. [InstallationProcessAuxiliaryBack-Office](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/installation-process-for-the-maitred-auxiliary-back-office)
2. [Installation Process for the Maitre'D Backup Server](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/installation-process-for-the-maitred-backup-server)


# Installation Process for the Maitre'D Back-Office

### Installation Process for the Maitre'D Back-Office

1. Start the installation process using one of the following methods:
   * [Start the Installation from a DVD (or downloaded DVD files)](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/start-the-installation-from-a-dvd-or-downloaded-dvd-files), or;
   * [Start the Installation from Downloaded Files](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/start-the-installation-from-downloaded-files).
2. Before performing the actual installation, the InstallShield Wizard will analyze your system. If required software components are missing, these will be installed at this point. Click the Install button to proceed.

![Installation - Prerequisites](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/04-Prerequisites.png)

![Installation - Prerequisites - Progress](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/01-PrerequisitesProgress.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The PC may need to be restarted after components are installed. Following a computer restart, you will need to start the installation process again.
{% endhint %}

3. A splash Screen will be briefly displayed.

![Installation - Splash Screen](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/Splash.gif)

4. The InstallShield Wizard will prepare the installation. This could take a few seconds.

![Installation - Preparation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/04a-Preparing.png)

5. The welcome screen appears. Click Next > to continue the installation.

![Installation - Welcome](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/05-Welcome.png)

6. Read the license agreement and select I accept the terms of the license agreement. Click Next > to continue.

![Installation - EULA](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/06-EULA.png)

7. Select the Maitre’D installation folders and click Next > to continue.

![Installation - Path](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/07-Path.png)

8. Select the type of installation and click Next > to continue. The available types are described below.

![Installation - Demo Selection](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/08-DemoSelect.png)

#### Empty Data

Select this option to install Maitre’D with an empty database. It will need to be fully programmed before use.

#### French demo restaurant data

Select this option to install a generic restaurant data for demonstration purposes in the French language.

#### Load data at startup

Select this option to restore an existing restaurant data when the software is started for the first time.

#### Standard demo restaurant data

Select this option to install a generic restaurant data for demonstration purposes in the English language.

9. Select the Maitre’D program group that will be created in the Windows Start Menu. Click Next > to continue.

![Installation - Start Menu Program Group](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/09-StartMenuProgramGroup.png)

10. Files will be installed automatically. This could take a few minutes.

![Installation - Progress](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/10-Progress.png)

11. If a service pack is available, installation will start automatically. It is highly recommended to always install the latest service pack available before using the Maitre’D software. Click Yes to begin the installation of the service pack.

![Installation - Service Pack Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/11-SP_Prompt.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Installation of the latest service pack available is required to maintain PCI-DSS compliance. Installation of the latest service pack is also required to benefit from the latest feature updates and bug fixes.
{% endhint %}

a. The InstallShield Wizard will prepare the Service Pack installation. This could take a few seconds.

![Service Pack Update - Preparation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/12-SP_Prepare.png)

b. The welcome screen appears. Click Next > to continue the installation.

![Service Pack Update - Welcome](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/13-SP_Welcome.png)

c. Read the license agreement. Click Yes to agree and continue the installation.

![Service Pack Update - EULA](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/14-SP_EULA.png)

d. Select the path where the BO.INI file can be found. This should not need to be changed, but you can click Browse… to change the folder if required. The service pack files will be installed in the path as defined in the BO.INI file. Click Next > to proceed.

![Service Pack Update - Path](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/15-SP_Path.png)

e. Files will be copied. This could take a few minutes.

![Service Pack Update - Progress](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/16-SP_Progress.png)

12. After files are copied, the InstallShield wizard will remind you that the computer needs to be restarted before Maitre'D can be used. Click the Finish button.

<img src="https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/17-WizardComplete.png" alt="Installation - Restart" height="523" width="692">

13. A dialog box will inform you that your computer is about to be restarted. Click OK, and your computer will restart.

![Prompt - Restart](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/18-RestartPrompt.png)

{% hint style="danger" %}
WARNING! Do not attempt to override the computer restart. This will damage the Maitre'D files and cause various issues.
{% endhint %}

14. After the computer restart, the Maitre'D Back-Office Server will attempt to start.
15. Since there is no license installed, you will be prompted to enter a license serial number and a commerce name.

![License Activation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/19-ActivationPrompt.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Now that the Maitre'D files are in place, it is strongly suggested to configure the Maitre'D Shared Folder correctly, even before activating the license. Please see [Configure the Maitre'D Sharing Options](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/appendix-troubleshooting/configure-the-maitred-sharing-options)
{% endhint %}

The installation process is now completed. Please proceed to the Maitre’D license activation.

Related Topics

1. [Configure the Maitre'D Sharing Options](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/appendix-troubleshooting/configure-the-maitred-sharing-options)
2. [Old icons are displayed following Maitre'D upgrade](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/appendix-troubleshooting/old-icons-are-still-displayed-after-upgrading-to-the-latest-version-of-maitred-upragade)


# Installation Process for the Maitre'D Point of Sale

### Installation Process for the Maitre'D Point of Sale

(blank in the original doc)

<figure><img src="/files/XOzhV2V7E1rgpSHzYQc5" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Installation Process for the Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office

### Installation Process for the Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Before installing a Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office, the main Maitre'D Back-Office must be installed. Its license must also be activated, and the Maitre'D Back-Office Server must be running.
{% endhint %}

1. Start the installation process using one of the following methods:
   * [Start the Installation from a DVD (or downloaded DVD files)](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/start-the-installation-from-a-dvd-or-downloaded-dvd-files), or;
   * [Start the Installation from Downloaded Files](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/start-the-installation-from-downloaded-files).
2. Before performing the actual installation, the InstallShield Wizard will analyze your system. If required software components are missing, these will be installed at this point. Click the Install button to proceed.

![Installation - Prerequisites](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/04-Prerequisites.png)

![Installation - Prerequisites - Progress](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/01-PrerequisitesProgress.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The PC may need to be restarted after components are installed. Following a computer restart, you will need to start the installation process again.
{% endhint %}

3. A splash Screen will be briefly displayed.

![Installation - Splash Screen](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/Splash.gif)

4. The InstallShield Wizard will prepare the installation. This could take a few seconds.

![Installation - Preparation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/04a-Preparing.png)

5. The welcome screen appears. Read the welcome message to make sure that the InstallShield Wizard will install an Auxiliary Back-Office. Click Next > to continue the installation.

![InstallShield Wizard Welcome Screen - AUXILIARY](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/04-Welcome.png)

6. Read the license agreement and select I accept the terms of the license agreement. Click Next > to continue.

![Installation - EULA](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/06-EULA.png)

7. Select the Maitre’D installation folders and click Next > to continue.

![InstallShield Wizard Path - AUXILIARY](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/06-Path.png)

8. Select whether you prefer connecting to the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Server by Machine Name or by IP Address.

![InstallShield Wizard - Select Name or IP](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/07a-SelectByMachineName.png)

a. If Select by Machine Name was selected, you will be asked to select the PC on which the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Server is running. Click OK after making a selection.

![Computer Selection](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/08a-ComputerSelect.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: If the computer running the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Server is not listed, click Cancel and connect by IP Address instead.
{% endhint %}

b. If Select by IP Address was selected, you will be asked to type the IP address of the PC on which the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Server is running. Click Next > after typing the IP address.

![IP Address Entry](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/08b-IPAddress.png)

9. You will be asked to provide a Workstation User ID Number for the Auxiliary Back-Office. This number needs to be unique (not already used by a POS, another auxiliary or another backup server) and between 1 and 63 inclusively.

![Workstation ID Number](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/09-WSNumber.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: We recommend assigning a number higher than the maximum number of POS, while also leaving "free numbers" for future expansion. For example, if you currently have 4 POS workstations, we would recommend assigning number 10 to the Auxiliary Back-Office.
{% endhint %}

10. Files will be installed automatically. This could take a few minutes.

![Installation - Progress](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/10-Progress.png)

11. If a service pack is available, installation will start automatically. It is highly recommended to always install the latest service pack available before using the Maitre’D software. Click Yes to begin the installation of the service pack.

![Installation - Service Pack Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/11-SP_Prompt.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Installation of the latest service pack available is required to maintain PCI-DSS compliance. Installation of the latest service pack is also required to benefit from the latest feature updates and bug fixes.
{% endhint %}

a. The InstallShield Wizard will prepare the Service Pack installation. This could take a few seconds.

![Service Pack Update - Preparation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/12-SP_Prepare.png)

b. The welcome screen appears. Click Next > to continue the installation.

![Service Pack Update - Welcome](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/13-SP_Welcome.png)

c. Read the license agreement. Click Yes to agree and continue the installation.

![Service Pack Update - EULA](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/14-SP_EULA.png)

d. Select the path where the BO.INI file can be found. This should not need to be changed, but you can click Browse… to change the folder if required. The service pack files will be installed in the path as defined in the BO.INI file. Click Next > to proceed.

![Service Pack Update - Path](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/15-SP_Path.png)

e. Files will be copied. This could take a few minutes.

![Service Pack Update - Progress](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/16-SP_Progress.png)

12. After files are copied, the InstallShield wizard will remind you that the computer needs to be restarted before Maitre'D can be used. Click the Finish button.

<img src="https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/17-WizardComplete.png" alt="Installation - Restart" height="523" width="692">

13. A dialog box will inform you that your computer is about to be restarted. Click OK, and your computer will restart.

![Prompt - Restart](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/18-RestartPrompt.png)

{% hint style="danger" %}
WARNING! Do not attempt to override the computer restart. This will damage the Maitre'D files and cause various issues.
{% endhint %}

14. After the computer restart, start the Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office by double-clicking the icon on the Windows desktop.

![Desktop Icon - Auxiliary Back-Office](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Desktop%20Icon-AUXBack-Office.png)

15. Since there is no license installed, you will be prompted to enter a license serial number and a commerce name.

![License Activation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/19-ActivationPrompt.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Now that the Maitre'D files are in place, it is strongly suggested to configure the Maitre'D Shared Folder correctly, even before activating the license. Please see [Configure the Maitre'D Sharing Options](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/Troubleshooting/ConfigureMaitreDShare.htm)
{% endhint %}

The installation process is now completed. Please proceed to the Maitre’D license activation.

Related Topics

1. [Configure the Maitre'D Sharing Options](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/appendix-troubleshooting/configure-the-maitred-sharing-options)
2. [Old icons are displayed following Maitre'D upgrade](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/appendix-troubleshooting/old-icons-are-still-displayed-after-upgrading-to-the-latest-version-of-maitred-upragade)


# Installation Process for the Maitre'D Backup Server

### Installation Process for the Maitre'D Backup Server

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Before installing a Maitre'D Backup Server, the main Maitre'D Back-Office must be installed. Its license must also be activated, and the Maitre'D Back-Office Server must be running.

Additionally, the POS software must be installed locally on the PC where the Backup Server will be installed.
{% endhint %}

1. Start the installation process using one of the following methods:
   * [Start the Installation from a DVD (or downloaded DVD files)](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/start-the-installation-from-a-dvd-or-downloaded-dvd-files), or;
   * [Start the Installation from Downloaded Files](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-2-installation-and-initial-setup/installation/start-the-installation-from-downloaded-files).
2. Before performing the actual installation, the InstallShield Wizard will analyze your system. If required software components are missing, these will be installed at this point. Click the Install button to proceed.

![Installation - Prerequisites](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/04-Prerequisites.png)

![Installation - Prerequisites - Progress](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/01-PrerequisitesProgress.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The PC may need to be restarted after components are installed. Following a computer restart, you will need to start the installation process again.
{% endhint %}

3. A splash Screen will be briefly displayed.

![Installation - Splash Screen](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/Splash.gif)

4. The InstallShield Wizard will prepare the installation. This could take a few seconds.

![Installation - Preparation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/04a-Preparing.png)

5. The welcome screen appears. Read the welcome message to make sure that the InstallShield Wizard will install a Maitre'D Backup Server. Click Next > to continue the installation.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallBACKUP/01-Welcome-Backup.png)

6. Read the license agreement and select I accept the terms of the license agreement. Click Next > to continue.

![Installation - EULA](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/06-EULA.png)

7. Select the Maitre’D installation folders and click Next > to continue.

![InstallShield Wizard Path - AUXILIARY](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/06-Path.png)

8. Select whether you prefer connecting to the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Server by Machine Name or by IP Address.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/07a-SelectByMachineName.png)

a. If Select by Machine Name was selected, you will be asked to select the PC on which the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Server is running. Click OK after making a selection.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/08a-ComputerSelect.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: If the computer running the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Server is not listed, click Cancel and connect by IP Address instead.
{% endhint %}

b. If Select by IP Address was selected, you will be asked to type the IP address of the PC on which the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Server is running. Click Next > after typing the IP address.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/08b-IPAddress.png)

9. You will be asked to provide a Workstation User ID Number for the Backup Server. This number needs to be unique (not already used by a POS, another auxiliary or another backup server) and between 1 and 63 inclusively.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstallAUX/09-WSNumber.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: We recommend assigning a number higher than the maximum number of POS, while also leaving "free numbers" for future expansion. For example, if you currently have 4 POS workstations, we would recommend assigning number 10 to the Auxiliary Back-Office.
{% endhint %}

10. Files will be installed automatically. This could take a few minutes.

![Installation - Progress](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/10-Progress.png)

11. If a service pack is available, installation will start automatically. It is highly recommended to always install the latest service pack available before using the Maitre’D software. Click Yes to begin the installation of the service pack.

![Installation - Service Pack Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/11-SP_Prompt.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Installation of the latest service pack available is required to maintain PCI-DSS compliance. Installation of the latest service pack is also required to benefit from the latest feature updates and bug fixes.
{% endhint %}

a) The InstallShield Wizard will prepare the Service Pack installation. This could take a few seconds.

![Service Pack Update - Preparation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/12-SP_Prepare.png)

b) The welcome screen appears. Click Next > to continue the installation.

![Service Pack Update - Welcome](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/13-SP_Welcome.png)

c) Read the license agreement. Click Yes to agree and continue the installation.

![Service Pack Update - EULA](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/14-SP_EULA.png)

d) Select the path where the BO.INI file can be found. This should not need to be changed, but you can click Browse… to change the folder if required. The service pack files will be installed in the path as defined in the BO.INI file. Click Next > to proceed.

![Service Pack Update - Path](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/15-SP_Path.png)

e) Files will be copied. This could take a few minutes.

![Service Pack Update - Progress](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/16-SP_Progress.png)

12. After files are copied, the InstallShield wizard will remind you that the computer needs to be restarted before Maitre'D can be used. Click the Finish button.

<img src="https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/17-WizardComplete.png" alt="Installation - Restart" height="523" width="692">

13. A dialog box will inform you that your computer is about to be restarted. Click OK, and your computer will restart.

![Prompt - Restart](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/18-RestartPrompt.png)

{% hint style="danger" %}
WARNING! Do not attempt to override the computer restart. This will damage the Maitre'D files and cause various issues.
{% endhint %}

14. After the computer restart, start the Maitre'D Back-Office Server will attempt to start itself in Backup mode.

&#x20;

15. Since there is no license installed, you will be prompted to enter a license serial number and a commerce name.

![License Activation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/19-ActivationPrompt.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Now that the Maitre'D files are in place, it is strongly suggested to configure the Maitre'D Shared Folder correctly, even before activating the license. Please see [Configure the Maitre'D Sharing Options](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/Troubleshooting/ConfigureMaitreDShare.htm)
{% endhint %}

The installation process is now completed. Please proceed to the Maitre’D license activation.

Related Topics

1. [Configure the Maitre'D Sharing Options](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/appendix-troubleshooting/configure-the-maitred-sharing-options)
2. [Old icons are displayed following Maitre'D upgrade](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/appendix-troubleshooting/old-icons-are-still-displayed-after-upgrading-to-the-latest-version-of-maitred-upragade)


# License Activation

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Main Back Office - Before Activating the License</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/AJGDAfZ1RCBDpM896eoD">/pages/AJGDAfZ1RCBDpM896eoD</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Main Back-Office - License Activation </td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/3cYtx4Axgx44CR6dehHH">/pages/3cYtx4Axgx44CR6dehHH</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Auxiliary Back - Office - Before Activating the License </td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/2BMn5GOe2XfwK5u7FPSd">/pages/2BMn5GOe2XfwK5u7FPSd</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Auxiliary Back - Office License Activation</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/RYIRn1GtaNVy4BgrE5Y5">/pages/RYIRn1GtaNVy4BgrE5Y5</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Main Back Office - Before activating the license

### Maitre'D Back-Office License Activation

#### Before activating the license

Before the license can be activated, you need:

#### License Serial Number

The Maitre’D license serial number can be obtained by ordering a Maitre’D license through our ordering system, by phone or by e-mail.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: Please note that there is a turnaround time of 4 hours for all orders and that new licenses are only created during normal business hours. The License serial number can be found on the invoice received after the creation of the license.
{% endhint %}

#### Commerce Name

Obtain the commerce name from the restaurant owner or manager. The commerce name is limited to 20 characters, including spaces.

When a new license is activated for the first time, you will be given the opportunity to configure the commerce name as it will appear in the Maitre’D Back-Office, on report headers and on the header of printed guest checks, invoices and receipts.

***

### License activation process

With the license serial number and commerce name in hand, you can proceed with the license activation.

1. After restarting from the installation of the Maitre’D Back-Office, Auxiliary or Backup Server software, the Maitre’D License Activation prompt will automatically appear.

![Serial Number & Commerce name Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/19-ActivationPrompt.png)

2. Enter the required information:

![Serial Number & Commerce name Filled](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/01-SerialCommerce.png)

a. Type in the license Serial Number as it appears on your Maitre’D invoice.

b. Type in the Commerce Name as it should appear in the Maitre’D Back-Office, on report headers and on the header of printed guest checks, invoices and receipts.

c. Click Next >> to continue the process.

&#x20;

3. The Site Code will be generated. Select it and copy it to the clipboard.

![Request Key Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02-SiteCode.png)

4. Logon to the Maitre'D Distributor Portal:

<http://distributors.maitredpos.com/>

5. Select your language.
6. Enter your username and password, then click the Login button.
7. Click the License Activation link, near the top of the page.

![Website - License Activation Link](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02a-Website1.png)

8. Type in the license serial number and click the Submit button.

![Website - Submit Serial Number](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02b-Website2.png)

9. Locate the activation record for your license and click the Activate link.

![Website - Activate](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02c-Website3.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The activation record for the Main Back-Office is identified by the word "Main" in the record header. Also, all the modules and interfaces purchased with the license are listed.
{% endhint %}

10. If this is the very first activation of this license, you will be allowed to type in the Restaurant Name (commerce name). This name is case sensitive. Otherwise, the restaurant name will be filled in for you and cannot be modified.
11. Paste in the Site Code copied earlier.
12. Click the Generate button.

![Website - Site Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02d-Website4.png)

13. Your Activation Code (key code) will be generated. Select it and copy it to the clipboard.

![Website - Key Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02e-Website5.png)

14. Paste the key code (activation code) in the Key Code field and click Next >> to continue.

![Key Code Entry](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/03-EnterKeyCode.png)

15. A confirmation prompt will appear, stating that the computer needs to be restarted.

![Restart Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/04-AuthorizedRestart.png)

16. Click Yes to restart your computer.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! The computer MUST be restarted at this point. Otherwise, the license will not work properly.
{% endhint %}

17. After restarting, the Maitre’D Back-Office Server will attempt to start itself. You may see various progress bars as the Maitre'D database is updated.

![Updating Database](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/05-UpdatingDatabase.png)

18. If the Maitre’D Back-Office Server is not already authorized, a Windows Security Alert will be triggered from the Windows Firewall:

![Windows Security Alert](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/06-WindowsDefenderFirewall.png)

a. If the Maitre’D Back-Office computer is on a domain, select the Domain networks, such as a workplace network option.

b. If the Maitre’D Back-Office computer is on a network without a domain, select the Private networks, such as my home or work network option.

c. Click the Allow Access button.

19. The Maitre'D Back-Office Server will start, and an icon will be added to the notification area.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/07-BOSrvStarted.png)

The Maitre'D Back-Office Software is now licensed to run on this PC.


# Auxiliary Back-Office - Before activating the license

### Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office License Activation

#### Before activating the license

Before the license can be activated, you need:

#### License Serial Number

When activating an Auxiliary Back-Office, the serial number to use is the same as the Main Back-Office. The Auxiliary back-Office is an option that can be purchased through the same channels as new licenses and license add-ons.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: Please note that there is a turnaround time of 4 hours for all orders and that new licenses are only created during normal business hours. The License serial number can be found on the invoice received after the creation of the license.
{% endhint %}

#### Commerce Name

When activating an Auxiliary Back-Office, the Main Back-Office should already be up-and-running, therefore the commerce name is already established and can no longer be changed.

Obtain the commerce name from printed guest checks or receipts, or by looking up the license details on the Main Back-Office PC.

### License activation process

With the license serial number and commerce name in hand, you can proceed with the license activation.

1. After restarting from the installation of the Maitre’D Back-Office, Auxiliary or Backup Server software, the Maitre’D License Activation prompt will automatically appear.

![Serial Number & Commerce name Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/19-ActivationPrompt.png)

2. Enter the required information:

![Serial Number & Commerce name Filled](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/01-SerialCommerce.png)

a. Type in the license Serial Number as it appears on your Maitre’D invoice.

b. Type in the Commerce Name as it should appear in the Maitre’D Back-Office, on report headers and on the header of printed guest checks, invoices and receipts.

c. Click Next >> to continue the process.

&#x20;

3. The Site Code will be generated. Select it and copy it to the clipboard.

![Request Key Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02-SiteCode.png)

4. Logon to the Maitre'D Distributor Portal:

<http://distributors.maitredpos.com/>

5. Select your language.
6. Enter your username and password, then click the Login button.
7. Click the License Activation link, near the top of the page.

![Website - License Activation Link](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02a-Website1.png)

8. Type in the license serial number and click the Submit button.

![Website - Submit Serial Number](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02b-Website2.png)

9. Locate the activation record for your license and click the Activate link.

![License Activation - Auxiliary](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/10-AUX-Activation.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The activation record for the Auxiliary Back-Office is identified by the word "Auxiliary" in the record header. Because the Main Back-Office was already activated, the commerce name is displayed and cannot be modified.
{% endhint %}

10. If this is the very first activation of this license, you will be allowed to type in the Restaurant Name (commerce name). This name is case sensitive. Otherwise, the restaurant name will be filled in for you and cannot be modified.
11. Paste in the Site Code copied earlier.
12. Click the Generate button.

![Website - Site Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02d-Website4.png)

13. Your Activation Code (key code) will be generated. Select it and copy it to the clipboard.

![Website - Key Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02e-Website5.png)

14. Paste the key code (activation code) in the Key Code field and click Next >> to continue.

![Key Code Entry](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/03-EnterKeyCode.png)

15. A confirmation prompt will appear, stating that the computer needs to be restarted.

![Restart Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/04-AuthorizedRestart.png)

16. Click Yes to restart your computer.

{% hint style="info" %}
IMPORTANT! The computer MUST be restarted at this point. Otherwise, the license will not work properly.
{% endhint %}

17. After restarting, start the Maitre’D Auxiliary Back-Office by double-clicking the corresponding icon on the Windows Desktop.

![Desktop Icon - Auxiliary Back-Office](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Desktop%20Icon-AUXBack-Office.png)

The Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office Software is now licensed to run on this PC.


# First login

### First login

This section explains how to logon to the Maitre’D Back-Office for the first time after installing and activating the Maitre’D software.

1. From the Windows Desktop, double-click the Maitre’D Back-Office icon.

![Desktop Icon - Maitre'D Back-Office](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Desktop%20Icon%20-%20MDBackOffice.gif)

2. The login prompt appears. Type Distributor (with a capital “D”) in the User Name field, and press the space bar twice in the password field. Click OK to proceed.

![Login Screen - First Login](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/FirstLogin/01-FirstLogin.gif)

3. The language selector appears. Select the appropriate language and click OK to proceed.

![Language Selector](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/FirstLogin/02-LanguageSelect.gif)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The language that is selected by default depends on the language settings of the System Owner access level.
{% endhint %}

4. You will be prompted to create a new Distributor password. Enter a password that meets requirements and click OK to proceed.

![Change Password](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/FirstLogin/03-ChangePassword.gif)

5. The Maitre’D Back-Office desktop will be displayed.

![Maitre'D Back-Office Desktop](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/04-MDBack-OfficeSuite7.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! After the first login, it is strongly recommended to create more Maitre’D Back-Office user accounts for managers and employees who will require access to the Maitre'D Back-Office for various tasks.
{% endhint %}


# Chap 3: Maitre 'D Back-Office

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Main Back-Office Introduction</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/nUiZNLaw3OfiOe1jjkj0">/pages/nUiZNLaw3OfiOe1jjkj0</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>License Management</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/wqboLiTqXOmUdoUqyqJj">/pages/wqboLiTqXOmUdoUqyqJj</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>User &#x26; Acesse Management</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/C8BUp6dE7VJVv9C6qIqi">/pages/C8BUp6dE7VJVv9C6qIqi</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Help Contents</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/5TdB6e8apKMcm6L07jC4">/pages/5TdB6e8apKMcm6L07jC4</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Main Back-Office Introduction

### Main Back-Office Introduction

The Main Back-Office desktop is the starting point for all tasks that can be carried out at the Maitre'D Back-Office PC.  It gives you access to all the Maitre'D modules as well as tools to manage your license options and Back-Office users.&#x20;

![](/files/avEnzXhHTPsxcz56m5HD)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The screenshot above displays all available modules. Modules that are not included with your license will not be displayed, so your own Maitre'D Back-Office desktop may look slightly different.
{% endhint %}

***

### Maitre'D Back-Office Modules

Below is a short description of every module and option that can appear on the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Desktop. For more information on a specific module, please consult the documentation specific to that module.

***

### Point of Sale Control&#x20;

## ![](/files/bIJVLeW7O9kJknOvrd6i) ![](/files/n2JxG4nLWSH9RFT79HuG)

The Point of Sale (POS) Control module is a core Maitre'D module that is included with every license. It allows restaurants to manage their day-to-day operations from one central location. This is where employee access to the POS workstations is managed and where sales items are created.

***

### Delivery

![](/files/HSuhB1zS7I6neWKVPdHK)![](/files/cga5ShoS3Ub2aK5aPHBy)

Delivery is an optional module that can be purchased separately. It allows restaurants to configure the delivery system, including creating, modifying and deleting customers and street code records.

***

### Electronic Funds Transfer

![](/files/AZ2JSwuGqQF33LUUAB5F)

![](/files/NhhvC2y03XJV75sW2JTm)![](/files/aMyWDGlEHhxtEk4hPsQM)

Electronic Funds Transfer is an optional module that allows Maitre'D to interface with various payment solution providers to process credit and debit card payments.

***

### Inventory Management

## ![](/files/3gDJRBeYpqEslch2xtUn) ![](/files/W6wE1SBM1TeWLZVJOOEs)&#x20;

Inventory Management is an optional module that allows restaurants to keep track of all the stock trough recipes linking ingredients to sales items.

***

### Account Receivable

![](/files/TqJU5wXb4xw8h9mmW7tk) ![](/files/DeSQlOJ8RNoJWGfLenvh)

Account Receivable is an optional module that allows restaurants to manage their customer's accounts. Customers can charge meals to their account and restaurants can send statements to their customers.

***

### Time and Attendance&#x20;

![](/files/XMipUPMNNbpMoLH2MgPZ)![](/files/0lpgzfb04WGPKNDrkIAJ)

&#x20; ![](/files/svUnu66VaFGIVORpeyNM)

![Module Icon - Time and Attendance](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_TimeAttendance.svg) ![Module Icon - Time and Attennce Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_TimeAttendance-H.svg)

Time and Attendance is an optional module that allows restaurants to manage employee's schedules, tasks, pay rates, punch-in, punch-out and break times.

***

### Accounting Interface

![](/files/3xqExAyCOk8IRlDwoRGi) ![](/files/h0xugXPF7PHaKWS217cX)

The Accounting Interface is an optional module that allows Maitre'D to interface with third-party accounting software such as Quickbooks and ACCPAC.

***

### Report Center

![](/files/D1MMZztdzQXWmKcaDbW3)  ![](/files/M3JvqtTuT3LdSWIdnHcm)

![](/files/boK9BvA3SNmUIzemVghP)The report Center is a core Maitre'D module that is included with every license. It allows restaurants to generate reports for all aspects of their business.

***

### Database&#x20;

## ![](/files/P6gPc0mu4VMr4dMY7Hw0)  ![](/files/5tdko3lbKqu0EuHSO2oJ)&#x20;

System Configuration is a core Maitre'D module that is included with every license. It is used to configure general restaurant data such as postal and shipping addresses, and also to configure localization data such as currency symbols, date and time formats, etc. This module is also used to manage backups of the Maitre'D settings and contains advanced configuration options to modify all the prompts contained in the Maitre'D system.

***

### Server Control

## ![](/files/uReJyqOII66HROjbw9Cf) ![](/files/F1pEO2FKcf3v93hKYygK)

Server Control is a core Maitre'D module that is included with every license. As its name implies, this module contains all the options to manage the Maitre'D Back-Office Server, like starting and stopping the server, performing end-of-days, etc. This module also includes many optional interfaces such as the hotel Interface, gift certificate interface, discount manager, etc.

***

### Local Workstation

![](/files/uKNmx1oGCGyQDbnQUO2K) ![](/files/heyRYbkD2PKX7PecYqyR)

The Local Workstation icon appears when the Local Workstation option is enabled within the Server Control module. This option allows the main Back-Office PC to be used as a POS workstation.

***

### Converter

## &#x20;![](/files/pTyP7KESewBHrsluZnt2) ![](/files/iRZhC9MSfKn3kKV8U7k6)

Converter is an optional module that is included with E-Global and DataBoard solutions. It allows the conversion of data files from sales, management, payroll and inventory in industry-standard database format for consumption by E-Global Corporate Communication Module (CCM), DataBoard, or other third-party solution. It also manages incoming data from E-Global.

***

### Floor Management

![](/files/cqZwyEyu3m367oDX6LTd) ![](/files/GQAriOyGTTD5WyNU0yES)

Floor Management is an optional module that allows restaurants to manage their floor plans, create sections and view the floor plan with a graphical representation.

***

### Exit and log on

![](/files/5045kNLE7IznMtbvEsQU) ![](/files/bEt3ki96Xf7rWMsW0rkl)

The Exit and log on icon is used to quickly close all open Maitre'D Back-Office modules and display the login prompt.


# License Management

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Maitre'D Back-Office License Activation</td><td><a href="/pages/Rm4M7TvjqFsi8jittLbc">/pages/Rm4M7TvjqFsi8jittLbc</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Maitre'D Auxiliary Back- Office License Activation</td><td><a href="/pages/FpTOkBIv4yYrIct3nVYl">/pages/FpTOkBIv4yYrIct3nVYl</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Check Current License  Options</td><td><a href="/pages/FpTOkBIv4yYrIct3nVYl">/pages/FpTOkBIv4yYrIct3nVYl</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Add-on Option to Existing Lisense</td><td><a href="/pages/C2ZNK6zCSlGKPEuzx5SO">/pages/C2ZNK6zCSlGKPEuzx5SO</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Maitre'D Back-Office License Activation

### Maitre'D Back-Office License Activation

#### Before activating the license

Before the license can be activated, you need:

#### License Serial Number

The Maitre’D license serial number can be obtained by ordering a Maitre’D license through our ordering system, by phone or by e-mail.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: Please note that there is a turnaround time of 4 hours for all orders and that new licenses are only created during normal business hours. The License serial number can be found on the invoice received after the creation of the license.
{% endhint %}

#### Commerce Name

Obtain the commerce name from the restaurant owner or manager. The commerce name is limited to 20 characters, including spaces.

When a new license is activated for the first time, you will be given the opportunity to configure the commerce name as it will appear in the Maitre’D Back-Office, on report headers and on the header of printed guest checks, invoices and receipts.

***

### License activation process

With the license serial number and commerce name in hand, you can proceed with the license activation.

1. After restarting from the installation of the Maitre’D Back-Office, Auxiliary or Backup Server software, the Maitre’D License Activation prompt will automatically appear.

![Serial Number & Commerce name Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/19-ActivationPrompt.png)

2. Enter the required information:

![Serial Number & Commerce name Filled](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/01-SerialCommerce.png)

a.      Type in the license Serial Number as it appears on your Maitre’D invoice.

b.      Type in the Commerce Name as it should appear in the Maitre’D Back-Office, on report headers and on the header of printed guest checks, invoices and receipts.

c.        Click Next >> to continue the process.

&#x20;

3. The Site Code will be generated. Select it and copy it to the clipboard.

![Request Key Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02-SiteCode.png)

4. Logon to the Maitre'D Distributor Portal:

<http://distributors.maitredpos.com/>

5. Select your language.
6. Enter your username and password, then click the Login button.
7. Click the License Activation link, near the top of the page.

![Website - License Activation Link](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02a-Website1.png)

8. Type in the license serial number and click the Submit button.

![Website - Submit Serial Number](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02b-Website2.png)

9. Locate the activation record for your license and click the Activate link.

![Website - Activate](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02c-Website3.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The activation record for the Main Back-Office is identified by the word "Main" in the record header. Also, all the modules and interfaces purchased with the license are listed.
{% endhint %}

10. If this is the very first activation of this license, you will be allowed to type in the Restaurant Name (commerce name). This name is case sensitive. Otherwise, the restaurant name will be filled in for you and cannot be modified.
11. Paste in the Site Code copied earlier.
12. Click the Generate button.

![Website - Site Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02d-Website4.png)

13. Your Activation Code (key code) will be generated. Select it and copy it to the clipboard.

![Website - Key Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02e-Website5.png)

14. Paste the key code (activation code) in the Key Code field and click Next >> to continue.

![Key Code Entry](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/03-EnterKeyCode.png)

15. A confirmation prompt will appear, stating that the computer needs to be restarted.
16. Click Yes to restart your computer.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! The computer MUST be restarted at this point. Otherwise, the license will not work properly.
{% endhint %}

17. After restarting, the Maitre’D Back-Office Server will attempt to start itself. You may see various progress bars as the Maitre'D database is updated.

![Updating Database](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/05-UpdatingDatabase.png)

18. If the Maitre’D Back-Office Server is not already authorized, a Windows Security Alert will be triggered from the Windows Firewall:

![Windows Security Alert](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/06-WindowsDefenderFirewall.png)

a. If the Maitre’D Back-Office computer is on a domain, select the Domain networks, such as a workplace network option.

b. If the Maitre’D Back-Office computer is on a network without a domain, select the Private networks, such as my home or work network option.

c.  Click the Allow Access button.

19. The Maitre'D Back-Office Server will start, and an icon will be added to the notification area.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/07-BOSrvStarted.png)

The Maitre'D Back-Office Software is now licensed to run on this PC.


# Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office License Activation

### Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office License Activation

#### Before activating the license

Before the license can be activated, you need:

#### License Serial Number

When activating an Auxiliary Back-Office, the serial number to use is the same as the Main Back-Office. The Auxiliary back-Office is an option that can be purchased through the same channels as new licenses and license add-ons.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: Please note that there is a turnaround time of 4 hours for all orders and that new licenses are only created during normal business hours. The License serial number can be found on the invoice received after the creation of the license.
{% endhint %}

#### Commerce Name

When activating an Auxiliary Back-Office, the Main Back-Office should already be up-and-running, therefore the commerce name is already established and can no longer be changed.

Obtain the commerce name from printed guest checks or receipts, or by looking up the license details on the Main Back-Office PC.

***

### License activation process

With the license serial number and commerce name in hand, you can proceed with the license activation.

1. After restarting from the installation of the Maitre’D Back-Office, Auxiliary or Backup Server software, the Maitre’D License Activation prompt will automatically appear.

![Serial Number & Commerce name Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDInstall/19-ActivationPrompt.png)

2. Enter the required information:

![Serial Number & Commerce name Filled](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/01-SerialCommerce.png)

a. Type in the license Serial Number as it appears on your Maitre’D invoice.

b. Type in the Commerce Name as it should appear in the Maitre’D Back-Office, on report headers and on the header of printed guest checks, invoices and receipts.

c. Click Next >> to continue the process.

&#x20;

3. The Site Code will be generated. Select it and copy it to the clipboard.

![Request Key Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02-SiteCode.png)

4. Logon to the Maitre'D Distributor Portal:

<http://distributors.maitredpos.com/>

5. Select your language.
6. Enter your username and password, then click the Login button.
7. Click the License Activation link, near the top of the page.

![Website - License Activation Link](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02a-Website1.png)

8. Type in the license serial number and click the Submit button.

![Website - Submit Serial Number](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02b-Website2.png)

9. Locate the activation record for your license and click the Activate link.

![License Activation - Auxiliary](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/10-AUX-Activation.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The activation record for the Auxiliary Back-Office is identified by the word "Auxiliary" in the record header. Because the Main Back-Office was already activated, the commerce name is displayed and cannot be modified.
{% endhint %}

10. If this is the very first activation of this license, you will be allowed to type in the Restaurant Name (commerce name). This name is case sensitive. Otherwise, the restaurant name will be filled in for you and cannot be modified.
11. Paste in the Site Code copied earlier.
12. Click the Generate button.

![Website - Site Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02d-Website4.png)

13. Your Activation Code (key code) will be generated. Select it and copy it to the clipboard.

![Website - Key Code](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/02e-Website5.png)

14. Paste the key code (activation code) in the Key Code field and click Next >> to continue.

![Key Code Entry](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/03-EnterKeyCode.png)

15. A confirmation prompt will appear, stating that the computer needs to be restarted.

![Restart Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/04-AuthorizedRestart.png)

16. Click Yes to restart your computer.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! The computer MUST be restarted at this point. Otherwise, the license will not work properly.
{% endhint %}

17. After restarting, start the Maitre’D Auxiliary Back-Office by double-clicking the corresponding icon on the Windows Desktop.

<figure><img src="/files/hgTjuShNeViJPvKrsASf" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

The Maitre'D Auxiliary Back-Office Software is now licensed to run on this PC.


# Check Current License Options

## Check Current License Options

1. Logon to the Maitre’D Back-Office with appropriate credentials. (Distributor or System Owner)

<figure><img src="/files/8f4q2H2qmGB5XEKUSpeH" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/AhQclz9Y5xDKFYZBPbzA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. On the Main Back-Office screen, click on the File menu and select the Licenses… option.

![File > Licenses](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/LicenseMgmt/01-File-Licenses.png)

3. The Installed Licenses window will appear.

![Installed Licenses](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/LicenseMgmt/02-LicenseOptions.gif)

* Verify all the modules, interfaces and options listed here and make sure they correspond to your Maitre’D invoice.
* Also make sure that the license Serial Number and Commerce Name are correct.

If a purchased option is missing or if there is a mistake in the commerce name, please contact the Maitre’D help desk to have the missing options added to your license.


# Add-on Option to Existing License

## Add-on Option to Existing License

After your Maitre'D license has been activated, it is possible to add new options to it, to keep up with your business' growth. For instance, you could add a new module such as the Inventory Management module, or increase the number of POS workstations to meet your needs.

***

### Purchase add-on options

The first step to add new functionalities to your Maitre'D license is to contact your PayFacto representative to purchase the options you need. Once the purchase and invoicing process has been completed, you will be able to start the activation process.

***

### Add-on activation process

1. Logon to the Maitre’D Back-Office with appropriate credentials. (Distributor or System Owner)

<figure><img src="/files/cmnvh3h4Zs9mknSdHnXg" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

![Maitre'D Logon Screen](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/MD_LogonScreen.gif)

2. On the Main Back-Office screen, click on the File menu and select the Licenses… option.

![File > Licenses](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/LicenseMgmt/01-File-Licenses.png)

3. The Installed Licenses window will appear.

![Installed Licenses](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/LicenseMgmt/02-LicenseOptions.gif)

4. Click the Modify button. This will bring up the Request Key Code window. Leave this window up on the screen, and proceed to the next step.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/01-License-Modify.png)

5. Logon to the Maitre'D Distributor Portal:

<http://distributors.maitredpos.com/>        &#x20;

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/02-DistributorLogon.png)

6. Click on Orders and Licensing.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/03-OrdersLicensing.png)

7. Click on License Activation.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/04-LicenseActivation.png)

8. Enter the Maitre'D license Serial Number for which the add-on was purchased and click the Submit button.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/05-FillSerialNumber.png)

9. Available add-ons will be listed here. Locate the Add-On you wish to activate and click the Activate link. For the purpose of this example, we are activating an add-on for two new Mobile POS workstations.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/06-LocateAdd-On.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! If the add-on you are looking for is not listed, make sure it was ordered and invoiced. Also remember that there is a 72 hours turn-around time for new orders.
{% endhint %}

10. The Distributor Portal will request a Site Code.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/07a-SiteCode-Blank.png)

11. Copy the Site Code from the Request Key Code window which you left open earlier. Paste the Site Code in the Site Code field of the Distributor Portal. Click the Generate button on the Distributor Portal and click the Next >> button on the Request Key Code window.

<figure><img src="/files/pSQMFwZhXuxbG0b4YqnZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/07b-SiteCode-FILLED.png)

12. The Distributor Portal will now display the Activation Code. Select the entire code and copy it to the clipboard by pressing CTRL + C on your keyboard.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/08-ActivationCode.png)

13. Maitre'D will now request a Key Code. Paste the Activation Code which you copied from the website by pressing CTRL + V on your keyboard. Click Next >>

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/09a-KeyCodeBLANK.png) ![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/09b-KeyCodeFilled.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The terms "Activation Code" and "Key Code" are used interchangeably between Maitre'D and the distributor portal. For the purpose of license activation, they mean the same thing.
{% endhint %}

14. The Maitre'D license will be updated, which could take a few seconds. Once the license is updated, click Close.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/10-LicenseUpdated.png)

15. You will be prompted to restart the computer. Log off from the Maitre'D distributor portal, save your work and close applications that may be running, then click Yes to restart your computer.

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDLicense/Add-On/11-RestartPrompt.png)

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Do not attempt to skip or bypass the computer restart. This may cause your license to deactivate itself completely along with other unwanted effects.
{% endhint %}

Once the computer finishes restarting, logon to the Maitre'D Back-Office as you normally would and start using your new options.


# User & Acess Management

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Maitre'D User Editor</td><td><a href="/pages/JypVxqLN4rk1SKOONpwJ">/pages/JypVxqLN4rk1SKOONpwJ</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Maitre'D Access Editor</td><td><a href="/pages/k2KCH2GDuFBK8u7rXfzi">/pages/k2KCH2GDuFBK8u7rXfzi</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Maitre'D User Editor

### Maitre'D User Editor

After the initial logon and initial user creation is completed, other user accounts will need to be created. These accounts can be used for various tasks, ranging from basic reporting to all types of configuration changes. Due to the sensitive nature of the data that can be accessed through the Maitre’D Back-Office, its access needs to be protected adequately by usernames and passwords.

Furthermore, to ensure compliance with PCI-DSS, individual user accounts need to be created for each user requiring access to the Maitre’D Back-Office. Sharing accounts or disclosing passwords will automatically make your site non-compliant against PCI-DSS rules.

***

### Accessing the User Editor Tool

1. Logon to the Maitre’D Back-Office with appropriate credentials. (Distributor or System Owner)

![](/files/MO0WPLuhrISzTikc1LJb) ![](/files/FSNNdXsGic5TCrpKEVpH)

2. From the main back-office screen, click on the Tools menu, and select the User Editor option.

![Tools Menu - User Editor](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/UserEditor/01-Tools-UserEditor.jpg)

3. The User Editor window will be displayed. All existing users with access levels equal or lower than yours will be listed here, if any.

![User Editor](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/UserEditor/02-UserEditor.jpg)

<figure><img src="/files/NzZ4kITbBaHUbDLnL6j2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click the New button to create a new user.

&#x20;![](/files/fWlQrrxMReW0rUwGFOz7)

Click the Delete button to permanently delete an existing user

.![](/files/YiU5C10v3414ZEKjoczU)

This button is only available to PayFacto technicians to reset an account’s password history for troubleshooting purposes.

![](/files/8CiYyZhrCv7BKWUcmFby)

Click the UnLock button to unlock a locked account.

![](/files/rI0bPJmMw9s6kEsrAl3w)

Click the Discard button to clear information that was entered during the process of creating a new user.

&#x20;![](/files/lXuCclc1dlQ4LJjhvNoW)

Click OK to commit changes and exit out of the User Editor tool.&#x20;

![](/files/1sEmgUDCiWFWT3HjXqWn)

Click Apply to commit changes without exiting from the User Editor Tool.

![](/files/xoDn1L3MVwtRx9Y4FE8I)

Click Cancel to exit out of the User Editor tool without saving changes.

***

### Create a new user

![User Editor Sequence](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/UserEditor/03-UserEditorHighlight.gif)

#### 1. Click the New button to start the process.

#### 2. User Name

Type a user name for this account. The user name should allow the person logging in to be identified.

#### 3. Access Level

![Access Level Selection](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/UserEditor/04-AccessLevel.jpg)

Choose an access level for this user:

**Distributor**

This access is restricted to Maitre’D Certified technicians and Resellers. All other access levels are unable to see or grant this access.

**System Owner**

The System Owner access level is restricted to the restaurant management. Only top-level managers should have this access, as this allows them to create and delete other users, as well perform any administrative task on the Maitre’D system.

**Access Levels 2 through 8**

These access levels can be fully customized. These access levels can be used for anyone requiring access to the Maitre’D back-office software.

#### 4. Password

Type in a password for the new user. The password must be at least 7 characters, and comprised of a mix of letters and numbers.

#### 5. Confirm Password

Confirm the password for this new user.

#### 6. User must change password at next login

Enable this option to force the user to change the login password during the next login. This option should be used for every new account and afterwards if there is a doubt that an account password may have been compromised.

#### 7. Apply

Click the Apply button to create the user without exiting the User Editor. This will allow you to create more users.

#### 8. OK

Click OK to save your changes and exit.

***

### Changing passwords

Maitre’D will automatically force users to change their passwords every 90 days. Also, Maitre’D keeps a history of each user’s passwords so that the last 4 passwords cannot be re-used. In case a password becomes compromised or if you have any doubts to that effect, you can force any user to change their password by checking the User must change password at next login box in their account’s properties. Of course, you need to be logged in with Distributor or System Owner access in order to do this.

***

### Locked accounts

After 5 unsuccessful login attempts, Maitre’D will automatically lock the user account. To unlock an account, someone with Distributor or System Owner access needs to login, access the user editor, select the locked account and click the Unlock button.

Locked accounts are marked with a padlock icon:

<figure><img src="/files/Zd3j01Cib51c10YtHiXm" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

***

### General user accounts and passwords guidelines

* Never share your password with anyone, for any reason, under any circumstances.
* Use complex passwords. Maitre’D already forces you to use a minimum of 7 characters with a mix of letters and numbers, however:
  * Try using 8 or more characters. Long passwords are harder to guess.
  * Avoid using combinations like 123abcd, or 123456a, or abcdef1, etc. These combinations are easy to guess and can get your system compromised.
  * Avoid using combinations of adjacent letters and numbers on the keyboard, such as “qwertyu8”.
  * Avoid using common words with letters replaced by numbers or symbols, such as “P\@ssw0rd” or M1cro$0ft. Unfortunately, hackers know these tricks, too.
  * Try using 8 or more characters mixed in with capital letters, numbers and special characters. A very effective technique is to choose a phrase which only you would know, then take the first few letters of each word to start building your password. Then, throw in a few numbers and add a special character or two.
* Do not use any word from any dictionary in any language. Hackers can use sophisticated dictionary attacks; therefore, any dictionary words are not safe to use as passwords.
* Compare your password against "Most Common Password Lists", such as NordPass' annual list: [NordPass Top 200 Most Common Passwords](https://nordpass.com/most-common-passwords-list/). If your password (or a close variant) appears on this kind of lists, change it immediately.
* Never use any kind of personal information as your password, such as your spouse’s name, children’s names, birth dates, anniversaries, etc.
* Make sure that only key personnel have Distributor or System Owner access. Give lower access to everyone else.
* If you have even the smallest doubt that someone may know your password, have it changed immediately.
* When an employee quits or is terminated, immediately delete this person’s account from Maitre’D. If you need to keep the account for audit purposes, then immediately change the password.
* Strictly enforce passwords management policies with all employees using any part of your computer system.


# Maitre'D Access Editor

### Maitre'D Access Editor

The Access Editor is located under the Tools pull down menu in the main Back-Office screen.

![Tools Menu - Access Editor](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/AccessEditor/01-Tools-AccessEditor.png)

This option allows the creation and modification of Back-Office access levels.

There are 9 levels of access in Maitre’D. Level Zero is the highest and can access levels 1 to 8. Level 1 may access levels 2 to 8. A lower level access may not have more accesses than a higher level. E.g. Level 5 may only have access to those options available in 6 to 8.

***

### Distributor Access (Level 0)

This access is restricted to Maitre’D Certified technicians and installers. All other access levels are unable to see or grant this access. The properties of this access level cannot be modified, and except for certified technicians, no one should ever have this access, no matter the reason.

***

### System Owner Access (Level 1)

The System Owner access level is restricted to the restaurant management. Only top-level managers should have this access, as this allows them to create and delete other users, as well as take media reports with decrypted credit card PANs and expiration dates. This access cannot see or modify the distributor access.

***

### Access Levels 2 to 8

These levels can be fully customized. Each access level can change the properties of the lower access levels, but not the higher access levels. These levels can be assigned to anyone with a business requirement to use the back-office software. These access levels are typically assigned for price maintenance tasks, report taking, batch closing, etc.

***

### Default Language

The default language used throughout the Maitre’D Back-Office and POS workstations is determined by the language configured for the System Owner access level. All access levels can be assigned different languages, but it’s the System Owner language that will decide which one is the default.

***

### Access Level Selection

Upon opening the Access Editor tool, you will be prompted for an access level. Select the access level which you want to edit. Note that the Distributor access level cannot be edited.

\
&#x20;![Access Level Prompt](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/AccessEditor/02-AccessLevelSelect.gif)

![Access Level Prompt - Deployed](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/AccessEditor/02a-AccessLevelSelect.gif)

***

### Password Editor

![Password Editor](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/AccessEditor/03-AccessEditor.gif)

#### Password

Type in the quick-access password to use to open the Maitre’D Back-Office with this access level. This essentially allows the user to login by typing only a password, without a username.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: When the Use Username Login option is enabled under Server Control / View / Options / Advanced / Miscellaneous, the Password field is disabled and cannot be used. This is because this feature is incompatible with PCI-DSS compliance rules and needs to be completely disabled on systems where integrated credit cards are in use.
{% endhint %}

***

### Fast Access

Enabling the Fast Access option allows you to create scripted tasks for Maitre’D Back-Office users with this access. Instead of gaining full access to all the features of the Maitre’D Back-Office, the user will be forced to perform specific tasks.

#### Fast Access

Enable this option to enable the Fast Access feature and gain access to the Advanced Access option and Settings button. If this option is enabled without any other option, users will be constricted to their scripted tasks, without any possibility of performing any other action in the Maitre’D Back-Office.

#### Advanced Access

With this option enabled, users will be able to access all the features of the Maitre’D Back-Office once the scripted tasks have been executed.

#### Shortcut Access

This option only affects access levels 2 to 8. Enable this option to allow users to use the blue shortcuts throughout the Maitre’D Back-Office.

#### Settings&#x20;

![](/files/RnGUNmGQzhXvqojy8kaT)

Click the Settings button to configure the scripted tasks for this user access.

***

### Language

## &#x20;![](/files/BO854loAS44o8JXHhn19)

Select the Maitre’D Back-Office language to be used by this user access. Available choices are English, French or Spanish.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The language selected for the System Owner access level will determine the default language for the whole system, including POS workstations.
{% endhint %}

***

### Fast Access Settings

Fast Access Settings are accessed by clicking the Settings button on the Password Editor Screen. This dialog allows you to setup the tasks that users will be able to perform.

![Fast Access Editor - Blank](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/AccessEditor/06a-FastAccessSettings1.gif) ![Fast Access Editor - Filled](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/AccessEditor/06b-FastAccessSettings2.gif)

<figure><img src="/files/YK2zZOuk5RGH3rdYaPYI" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Select an existing task and click the Execute button to perform this task.&#x20;

&#x20;![](/files/IOUT8N5W5LlPHxDtf0lq)

Click the Add button to create a new task and add it to the list.

&#x20; ![](/files/eadL4nBianNaE0Nayz8B)

Select an existing task and click the Remove button to delete it from the list.

&#x20;![](/files/gjFDlMiZ7GfXbXi7Xvai)

Select an existing task and click the Edit button to change its properties.

&#x20;![](/files/EDfZfg99fHembrNISIUN)

Click the Save button to save settings and exit.&#x20;

![](/files/gdM7aN7w79xqvJQKOKYE)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

***

### Access Editor

The access editor allows you to fully customize the Maitre’D Back-Office modules and menu options that users can or cannot access.

The access editor can be used in conjunction with the Fast Access feature to further restrict access to only the features that are necessary for specific employee job function.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The Distributor Access Level cannot be restricted.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/o1f8X8HHC9jAbSDBvv7u" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/6s4RbDRqwI9NP1QtZYjU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

A green checkmark indicates that this user can access a module or menu.

![](/files/SwoXv5732SGdY1DMvAOj)

A red “X” indicates that this user cannot access the indicated module or menu.

![](/files/m77nqcUSO3YKGEOiudmb)

Use the “+” and “-“ signs to expand or collapse branches and sub-branches.&#x20;

&#x20;![](/files/ezEex0NklkHUkBASsWnv)

Select a branch or a menu option and click the Toggle button to switch between the green checkmark and red “X”. Toggling the top level of a branch will cause all the sub-elements under that branch to be toggled in one operation.

&#x20;![](/files/5sofNVdM2UJvy3iVUJdw)

Click the Apply button to save settings without exiting.

&#x20; ![](/files/MrpMB6TJbCHQFzsrOQ6b)

Click OK to save settings and exit.

![](/files/WDfpFBpLdeiDmSxc2NSv)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.


# Help Contents

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Back-Office Overview</td><td></td><td><a href="https://app.gitbook.com/o/QxxpM8gZ1cAK5nosA8e7/s/oJDkfptnj9M2tMkjy5Az/~/changes/137/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-3-maitre-d-back-office/help-conhttps://app.gitbook.com/o/QxxpM8gZ1cAK5nosA8e7/s/oJDkfptnj9M2tMkjy5Az/~/changes/137/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-3-maitre-d-back-office/help-contents/back-office-overviewtents/back-office-overview">https://app.gitbook.com/o/QxxpM8gZ1cAK5nosA8e7/s/oJDkfptnj9M2tMkjy5Az/~/changes/137/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-3-maitre-d-back-office/help-conhttps://app.gitbook.com/o/QxxpM8gZ1cAK5nosA8e7/s/oJDkfptnj9M2tMkjy5Az/~/changes/137/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-3-maitre-d-back-office/help-contents/back-office-overviewtents/back-office-overview</a></td></tr><tr><td>File</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/Cw5YHfsQgOW1CG5UtiFX">/pages/Cw5YHfsQgOW1CG5UtiFX</a></td></tr><tr><td>View</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/RCfPeJ6OprUEmyPVrIio">/pages/RCfPeJ6OprUEmyPVrIio</a></td></tr><tr><td>Tools</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/sbykFNeU3fig5Zv347x8">/pages/sbykFNeU3fig5Zv347x8</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Back-Office Overview

### Back-Office Overview

The Main Back-Office desktop is the starting point for all tasks that can be carried out at the Maitre'D Back-Office PC.  It gives you access to all the Maitre'D modules as well as tools to manage you license options and Back-Office users.

![Screenshot - Main Back-Office](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/04-MDBack-OfficeSuite7.png)

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The screenshot above displays all available modules. Modules that are not included with your license will not be displayed, so your own Maitre'D Back-Office desktop may look slightly different.
{% endhint %}

### Maitre'D Back-Office Modules

Below is a short description of every module and option that can appear on the Maitre'D Main Back-Office Desktop. For more information on a specific module, please consult the documentation specific to that module.

&#x20;

### Point of Sale Control

![Module Icon - Point of Sale Control](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_PointSales.svg) ![Module Icon - Point of Sale Control Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_PointSales-H.svg)

The Point of Sale (POS) Control module is a core Maitre'D module that is included with every license. It allows restaurants to manage their day-to-day operations from one central location. This is where employee access to the POS workstations is managed and where sales items are created.

&#x20;

### Delivery

![Module Icon - Delivery](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Delivery.svg) ![Module Icon - Delivery Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Delivery-H.svg)

Delivery is an optional module that can be purchased separately. It allows restaurants to configure the delivery system, including creating, modifying and deleting customers and street code records.

&#x20;

### Electronic Funds Transfer

![Module Icon - Electronic Funds Transfer](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_FundsTransfer.svg) ![Module Icon - Electronic Funds Transfer Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_FundsTransfer-H.svg)

Electronic Funds Transfer is an optional module that allows Maitre'D to interface with various payment solution providers to process credit and debit card payments.

&#x20;

### Inventory Management

![Module Icon - Inventory Management](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Inventory.svg) ![Module Icon - Inventory Management Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Inventory-H.svg)

Inventory Management is an optional module that allows restaurants to keep track of all the stock trough recipes linking ingredients to sales items.

&#x20;

### Account Receivable

![Module Icon - Account Receivable](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Receivable.svg) ![Module Icon - Account Receivable Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Receivable-H.svg)

Account Receivable is an optional module that allows restaurants to manage their customer's accounts. Customers can charge meals to their account and restaurants can send statements to their customers.

&#x20;

### Time and Attendance

![Module Icon - Time and Attendance](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_TimeAttendance.svg) ![Module Icon - Time and Attendance Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_TimeAttendance-H.svg)

Time and Attendance is an optional module that allows restaurants to manage employee's schedules, tasks, pay rates, punch-in, punch-out and break times.

&#x20;

### Accounting Interface

![Module Icon - Accounting Interface](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Accounting.svg) ![Module Icon - Accounting Interface Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Accounting-H.svg)

The Accounting Interface is an optional module that allows Maitre'D to interface with third-party accounting software such as Quickbooks and ACCPAC.

&#x20;

### Report Center

![Module Icon - Report Center](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_ReportCenter.svg) ![Module Icon - Report Center Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_ReportCenter-H.svg)

The report Center is a core Maitre'D module that is included with every license. It allows restaurants to generate reports for all aspects of their business.

&#x20;

### Database

![Module Icon - Database](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Database.svg) ![Module Icon - Database Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Database-H.svg)

Database is a core Maitre'D module that is included with every license. It is mainly used by trained Maitre'D specialists to troubleshoot issues or repair corrupt data.

&#x20;

### System Configuration

![Module Icon - System Configuration](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_System.svg) ![Module Icon - System Configuration Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_System-H.svg)

System Configuration is a core Maitre'D module that is included with every license. It is used to configure general restaurant data such as postal and shipping addresses, and also to configure localization data such as currency symbols, date and time formats, etc. This module is also used to manage backups of the Maitre'D settings and contains advanced configuration options to modify all the prompts contained in the Maitre'D system.

&#x20;

### Server Control

![Module Icon - Server Control](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Server.svg) ![Module Icon - Server Control Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Server-H.svg)

Server Control is a core Maitre'D module that is included with every license. As its name implies, this module contains all the options to manage the Maitre'D Back-Office Server, like starting and stopping the server, performing end-of-days, etc. This module also includes many optional interfaces such as the hotel Interface, gift certificate interface, discount manager, etc.

&#x20;

### Local Workstation

![Module Icon - Local Workstation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Worksation.svg) ![Module Icon - Local Workstation Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Worksation-H.svg)

The Local Workstation icon appears when the Local Workstation option is enabled within the Server Control module. This option allows the main Back-Office PC to be used as a POS workstation.

&#x20;

### Converter

![Module Icon - Converter](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Converter.svg) ![Module Icon - Converter Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Converter-H.svg)

Converter is an optional module that is included with E-Global and DataBoard solutions. It allows the conversion of data files from sales, management, payroll and inventory in industry-standard database format for consumption by E-Global Corporate Communication Module (CCM), DataBoard, or other third-party solution. It also manages incoming data from E-Global.

&#x20;

### Floor Management

![Module Icon - Floor Management](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Floor.svg) ![Module Icon - Floor Management Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Floor-H.svg)

Floor Management is an optional module that allows restaurants to manage their floor plans, create sections and view the floor plan with a graphical representation.

&#x20;

### Exit and log on

![Module Icon - Exit and Logon](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Log.svg) ![Module Icon - Exit and Logon Selected](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_Log-H.svg)

The Exit and log on icon is used to quickly close all open Maitre'D Back-Office modules and display the login prompt.


# File

### Licenses

The License option allows to view the options that are currently available on the active Maitre'D license. Additional modules, interfaces and components can be purchased through your Maitre'D Reseller or Sales Representative. Once purchased, they can be activated here.

![Screenshot - Installed Licenses](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/LicenseMgmt/02-LicenseOptions.gif)

**Serial Number**

Each Maitre'D installation has a unique serial number. You will need to provide this number when purchasing additional Maitre'D components or when calling the Help Desk.

**Commerce Name**

This is the commerce name that was assigned when the license was originally activated. It appears in the header of guest checks and receipts, as well as on the header of reports generated from the Report Center module.

![Button - Modify](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Modify.jpg)

Use the modify button to generate a site code and display the prompt that will allow you to enter an activation key for newly purchased Maitre'D components.

NOTE: The activation key can only be generated by authorized Maitre'D Resellers using the Maitre'D Distributor Portal, or by Maitre'D Help Desk Specialists.

![Button - Print](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Print.jpg)

Use the Print button to print the license information on the default printer.

![Button - Close](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Close.jpg)

Use the Close button to close this screen and return to the Maitre'D Back-Office.

***

### Printer Setup

This option is driven by the operating system. This option allows to select the printer and parameters you wish to use to print your reports.

#### Print Last Report

This option allows to view the last report requested and to reprint it if necessary

***

### Log

The Log option allows to start and view operations traces about Maitre'D Main Module.

**Log Level**

Three different Log level are available: Standard, Detail and Debug.

This option is for troubleshooting purposes and should only be used with the supervision of a certified Maitre'D specialist.

![Button - View](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-View.gif)

Use the View button to access to log file.


# View

### Status Bar

This option let you choose whether you want to see status bar (the line located at the bottom of your screen) or not. This selection toggles from enable and disable. When there is a check mark besides the option, the option is enabled and you will see the status bar.


# Tools

### Access Editor

This option allows the creation and modification of Back-Office access levels.

There are 9 levels of access in Maitre’D. Level Zero is the highest and can access levels 1 to 8. Level 1 may access levels 2 to 8. A lower level access may not have more accesses than a higher level. E.g. Level 5 may only have access to those options available in 6 to 8.

#### Distributor Access (Level 0)

This access is restricted to Maitre’D Certified technicians and installers. All other access levels are unable to see or grant this access. The properties of this access level cannot be modified, and except for certified technicians, no one should ever have this access, no matter the reason.

#### System Owner Access (Level 1)

The System Owner access level is restricted to the restaurant management. Only top-level managers should have this access, as this allows them to create and delete other users, as well as take media reports with decrypted credit card PANs and expiration dates. This access cannot see or modify the distributor access.

#### Access Levels 2 to 8

These levels can be fully customized. Each access level can change the properties of the lower access levels, but not the higher access levels. These levels can be assigned to anyone with a business requirement to use the back-office software. These access levels are typically assigned for price maintenance tasks, report taking, batch closing, etc.

### Password Editor

**Password**

Type in the quick-access password to use to open the Maitre’D Back-Office with this access level. This essentially allows the user to login by typing only a password, without a username.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: When the Use Username Login option is enabled under Server Control / View / Options / Advanced / Miscellaneous, the Password field is disabled and cannot be used. This is because this feature is incompatible with PCI-DSS compliance rules and needs to be completely disabled on systems where integrated credit cards are in use.
{% endhint %}

***

### **Fast Access**

Enabling the Fast Access option allows you to create scripted tasks for Maitre’D Back-Office users with this access. Instead of gaining full access to all the features of the Maitre’D Back-Office, the user will be forced to perform specific tasks.

**Fast Access**

Enable this option to enable the Fast Access feature and gain access to the Advanced Access option and Settings button. If this option is enabled without any other option, users will be constricted to their scripted tasks, without any possibility of performing any other action in the Maitre’D Back-Office.

**Advanced Access**

With this option enabled, users will be able to access all the features of the Maitre’D Back-Office once the scripted tasks have been executed.

**Shortcut Access**

This option only affects access levels 2 to 8. Enable this option to allow users to use the blue shortcuts throughout the Maitre’D Back-Office.

**Settings**

![Button - Settings](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Setting.gif)

Click the Settings button to configure the scripted tasks for this user access.

***

### **Language**

Select the Maitre’D Back-Office language to be used by this user access. Available choices are English, French or Spanish.

#### Fast Access Settings

![Button - Settings](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Setting.gif)

Fast Access Settings are accessed by clicking the Settings button on the Password Editor Screen. This dialog allows you to setup the tasks that users will be able to perform.

![Button - Execute](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Execute.gif)

Select an existing task and click the Execute button to perform this task.

![Button - Add](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Add.jpg)

Click the Add button to create a new task and add it to the list.

![Button - Remove](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Remove.gif)

Select an existing task and click the Remove button to delete it from the list.

![Button - Edit](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Edit.gif)

Select an existing task and click the Edit button to change its properties.

![Button - Save](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Save.gif)

Click the Save button to save settings and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

### Access Editor

The access editor allows you to fully customize the Maitre’D Back-Office modules and menu options that users can or cannot access.

The access editor can be used in conjunction with the Fast Access feature to further restrict access to only the features that are necessary for specific employee job function.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The Distributor Access Level cannot be restricted.
{% endhint %}

![Green Checkbox](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/AccessEditor/GreenCheck.gif)

A green checkmark indicates that this user can access a module or menu.

![Red Checkbox](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MDBack-OfficeSuite7/AccessEditor/RedCheck.gif)

A red \[X] indicates that this user cannot access the indicated module or menu.

Use the \[+] and \[-] signs to expand or collapse branches and sub-branches.

![Button - Toggle](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Toggle.gif)

Select a branch or a menu option and click the Toggle button to switch between the green checkmark and red \[X]. Toggling the top level of a branch will cause all the sub-elements under that branch to be toggled in one operation.

![Button - Apply](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Apply\(Reg\).gif)

Click the Apply button to save settings without exiting.

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Reg\).gif)

Click OK to save settings and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

***

### User Editor

Use this tool to create Maitre'D Back-Office user accounts with various access levels, tailored to the user's needs.

<figure><img src="/files/TItSwTY1vM77iyXIO4dR" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click the New button to create a new user.

<figure><img src="/files/M9ILUyzJzceocYT8Tk9I" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click the Delete button to permanently delete an existing user.

<figure><img src="/files/XH2azU6Q5VMPKDJcIth2" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

This button is only available to PayFacto technicians to reset an account’s password history for troubleshooting purposes.

<figure><img src="/files/A4qKl1whrpxK44m6huoO" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click the UnLock button to unlock a locked account.

<figure><img src="/files/0AnslLj3P15NET2wYmRC" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click the Discard button to clear information that was entered during the process of creating a new user.

<figure><img src="/files/YUppXn9xaNonagv2odvw" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click OK to commit changes and exit out of the User Editor tool.

<figure><img src="/files/wBtUgmHnHzDqMJ5CSxup" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click Apply to commit changes without exiting from the User Editor Tool.

<figure><img src="/files/Za88YneNeMV8aFYF3JAN" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click Cancel to exit out of the User Editor tool without saving changes.

**User Name**

Type a user name for this account. The user name should allow the person logging in to be identified.

**Access Level**

Choose an access level for this user:

**Distributor**

This access is restricted to Maitre’D Certified technicians and Resellers. All other access levels are unable to see or grant this access.

**System Owner**

The System Owner access level is restricted to the restaurant management. Only top-level managers should have this access, as this allows them to create and delete other users, as well perform any administrative task on the Maitre’D system.

**Access Levels 2 through 8**

These access levels can be fully customized. These access levels can be used for anyone requiring access to the Maitre’D back-office software.

**Password**

Type in a password for the new user. The password must be at least 7 characters, and comprised of a mix of letters and numbers.

**Confirm Password**

Confirm the password for this new user.

**User must change password at next login**

Enable this option to force the user to change the login password during the next login. This option should be used for every new account and afterwards if there is a doubt that an account password may have been compromised.

#### Changing passwords

Maitre’D will automatically force users to change their passwords every 90 days. Also, Maitre’D keeps a history of each user’s passwords so that the last 4 passwords cannot be re-used. In case a password becomes compromised or if you have any doubts to that effect, you can force any user to change their password by checking the User must change password at next login box in their account’s properties. Of course, you need to be logged in with Distributor or System Owner access in order to do this.

#### Locked accounts

After 5 unsuccessful login attempts, Maitre’D will automatically lock the user account. To unlock an account, someone with Distributor or System Owner access needs to login, access the user editor, select the locked account and click the Unlock button.

Locked accounts are marked with a padlock icon.


# Chap 4: Point of Sale Control

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td></td><td>Introduction to the Point of Sale Control </td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/Gg2lilL3vMr7pJ9Lf9iq">/pages/Gg2lilL3vMr7pJ9Lf9iq</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Point of Sale Control Module</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/G1Hu2m7oGiw9KR1ew0bT">/pages/G1Hu2m7oGiw9KR1ew0bT</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Taxes</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/VIIw8MeGUeXY8YF6g5Sz">/pages/VIIw8MeGUeXY8YF6g5Sz</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Managing Sales Systems</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/G03MlXkajaCkFT3KVn44">/pages/G03MlXkajaCkFT3KVn44</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Screens</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/2TTRB6dcQ6dY8DKncyeK">/pages/2TTRB6dcQ6dY8DKncyeK</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>payment</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/UdrtanaR2hc1SsdVZiKH">/pages/UdrtanaR2hc1SsdVZiKH</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Discounts and promotions</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/I9VXYRs8BCu7L4eLah7i">/pages/I9VXYRs8BCu7L4eLah7i</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Gratuity ,tips and Service</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/a1KksOEekCOpLLsh1mpO">/pages/a1KksOEekCOpLLsh1mpO</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>Help Contents</td><td></td><td><a href="/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji">/files/xOHIFXSwjTGRFV2kVQji</a></td><td><a href="/pages/tC3PVMvtFo1NhGlteurA">/pages/tC3PVMvtFo1NhGlteurA</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Introduction to the Point of Sale Control

##

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Overview</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/ElnsZRIl0AhIm7Dopn9E">/pages/ElnsZRIl0AhIm7Dopn9E</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Quick Service Restaurants (QSR) and Table Service Restaurants (TSR) </td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/ec3EFVS6bByHaoXFaasO">/pages/ec3EFVS6bByHaoXFaasO</a></td><td></td></tr><tr><td>Navigating the Point of Sale Controle module</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/xiRsSvVotxkIEwTVJuBL">/pages/xiRsSvVotxkIEwTVJuBL</a></td><td></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Overview

### Point of Sale Control - Overview

The Point of Sale (POS) Control module allows restaurants to manage their day-to-day operations from one central location. It is installed with the Maitre'D Back-Office Suite and is accessed through the Maitre'D Back-Office main window. All modules such as the Inventory Management module and the Time and Attendance module are linked to the POS Control module and require the POS Control module to function. The POS Control module allows restaurants to configure and manage the following tasks:

***

### Sales Item Management

Sales item management tasks such as creating and modifying sales items, divisions, categories, revenue centers and modifier lists are done through the POS Control.

***

### Employee Management

Several employee management tasks such as creating and modifying employees are done through the POS Control module. Roles can be assigned to employees as well as screen access and other options. For more advanced features, the Time and Attendance module can be used to manage employees.

***

### Frequent Diners and Rewards

Frequent Diners and Frequent Diner Promotions are configured through the POS Control module. This allows loyal customers to be rewarded for their patronage by offering them discounts on featured items and special offers.

Tracking Frequent Diners also allows restaurants to create a valuable guest database that can be used to advertise special events or the launch of new products, and print mailing labels.

Frequent Diner Promotions allow restaurants to reward their guests with points that can be used for future purchases. A frequent diner promotion is set up so that when guests spend a certain amount of money, they receive a number amount of points based on the purchase amount. For example, a customer may receive 5 points for every $100.00 they spend. Points can later be converted into dollar discounts, which are available to the returning guest.

Maitre'D can also print Rewards Coupons when guests settle their checks. Rewards Coupons are discounts that guests can apply towards future purchases. Restaurants can create multiple different Rewards and the system can select which Rewards Coupon to print based on the amount spent, the revenue center, or the mode.

***

### Backup and Reprint Checks

The POS Control module is used to create backups of checks and also to retrieve checks from previous backups. This allows an exact copy of a check from any past transaction to be viewed and reprinted.

***

### Configuring Workstation Screens and Workstation Options

The POS Control is used to configure the workstation screens such as preferential screens and screen layouts, and other general workstation options.

***

### Configuring Printers

The POS Control module is used to configure printers such as POS workstation printers, bar printers and kitchen printers. Redirection tables can also be configured through the POS Control module. Redirection tables determine where requisition coupons such as kitchen and bar printouts will be printed, and can be configured based on the time of the day, the POS workstation that is accessed, the role of the employee, or the revenue center. Configuring printers and redirection tables are explained in more detail in Chapter 5: Configuring and Managing POS Workstations.

***

### Configuring Payment Information

All information about taxes, media types such as credit cards, and void reasons are configured through the POS Control module.

***

### Generating Sales Reports

The POS Control module is used to generate Sales reports allowing the restaurant to analyze past and current sales data.


# Quick Service Restaurants (QSR) and Table Service Restaurants (TSR)

Maitre'D can be configured to operate in a Quick Service Restaurant (QSR) or a Table Service Restaurant (TSR). In certain cases, a restaurant may offer both Quick Service and Table Service, such as a restaurant that has a dining room, a take out counter, and a Drive-Thru lane. Maitre'D can function in both TSR and QSR operations simultaneously and display the appropriate screens and functionalities depending on the employees' configuration.

Maitre'D for Quick Service Restaurants (QSR) offers complete counter service functions that are ideal for fast food restaurants as well as Drive-Thru functions such as Break-In keys, Drive-Thru Customer Display interface, and direct order relay to the kitchen monitor allowing orders to be processed quickly.

Other features such as automatic combo detection, order queue management and the ability to reprint past checks ensure that customers are served accurately and without delay. The Maitre'D QSR mode also offers a complete set of reports that allow the restaurant manager to track the speed of service and the quality of service.

Modules such as the Maitre'D Delivery module can be added to extend the functionality of the Maitre'D Quick Service Restaurant (QSR).

Maitre'D for Table Service Restaurant (TSR) offers an extensive range of dining room functions that enable restaurants to better serve their guests. Features such as the ability to have open orders so that customers can continue to add items to their checks until they are ready to pay demonstrates the flexibility of the Maitre'D TSR mode. Other features include easy check splitting, a comprehensive floor management system, and the Order Hold and Fire function that ensures that there is an appropriate delay between each course of a meal. Like Maitre'D for QSR, Maitre'D for TSR operations includes a complete set of TSR reports that allow the restaurant to track service levels and to analyze sales figures.


# Navigating the Point of Sale Control module

All Maitre'D modules share the same general layout allowing users to quickly navigate through the modules. A menu bar in the top part of the window displays all the tasks and functions that can be performed using the POS Control module. The center pane is divided into two parts. The right hand side contains the same icons as the Maitre'D Back-Office main screen and allows users to open another module directly from the Point of Sale Control module. The left hand side contains a series of links to the most common tasks performed using the Point of Sale Control.

![Point of Sale Control Module Navigation](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/POSControlNavigation.png)


# Point of Sale Control Module

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th></th><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module</td><td></td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/SAZ3HwWGn7beBiL1vFij">/pages/SAZ3HwWGn7beBiL1vFij</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>POS Control - Configuration </td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/LIJwLRqJ100USRfau35F">/pages/LIJwLRqJ100USRfau35F</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>POS Control Configuration - Option</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/LJew3399f2UtehioMCYL">/pages/LJew3399f2UtehioMCYL</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>POS Control Configuration - POS</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/cZB4apPFQ7MULmdNejHN">/pages/cZB4apPFQ7MULmdNejHN</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>POS Control - Check</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/1vNLJBFFdbxLqcsPWlSQ">/pages/1vNLJBFFdbxLqcsPWlSQ</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>POS Control  - Printing</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/ltvr4dVP0ZfGfcJj68vD">/pages/ltvr4dVP0ZfGfcJj68vD</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>POS Control  - Security</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/64nHAU1QNXVH5PJQaB0D">/pages/64nHAU1QNXVH5PJQaB0D</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>POS Control - Gratuity Distribution</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/UzskuTZ6kL7ZM0Yu1rFf">/pages/UzskuTZ6kL7ZM0Yu1rFf</a></td></tr><tr><td></td><td>POS Control - Home Page</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/FPNQbPYi7YAldBKcntpd">/pages/FPNQbPYi7YAldBKcntpd</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module

Follow these steps to access the Point of Sale Control module options:

1. Logon to the Maitre’D Back-Office with appropriate credentials. (Distributor or System Owner)

![Desktop Icon - Maitre'D Back-Office](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Desktop%20Icon%20-%20MDBackOffice.gif) ![Maitre'D Logon Screen](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/MD_LogonScreen.gif)

2. Start the Point of Sale Control module.

![Back-Office Icon - Point of Sale Control](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_PointSales.svg)

3. Click on the View menu and select the Options... option.

![View menu - Options...](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/View-Options/01-ViewMenu-Options.png)

4. The Point of Sale Control module's options window opens on the Configuration branch.

![Point of Sale Control > View > Options > Configuration](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/View-Options/02-Configuration.png)

Proceed to the following topic(s) for detailed information on each option.

Related Topics

1. [Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/accessing-options-for-the-point-of-sale-control-module)
2. [POS Control - Configuration](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration)
3. [POS Control - Configuration > Option](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
4. [POS Control - Configuration > POS](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
5. [POS Control - Check](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-check)
6. [POS Control - Printing](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-printing)
7. [POS Control - Security](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-security)
8. [POS Control - Gratuity Distribution](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-gratuity-distribution)
9. [POS Control - Home Page](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-home-page)


# POS Control - Configuration

<figure><img src="/files/x3vgP7LSYr9ivq1zKmQP" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Number of Revenue Centers

Set the number of revenue centers that will be used. The default number is 4. The minimum is 1 and the maximum is 32. Examples of common revenue centers include "Dining Room", "Take Out", "Bar", "Delivery", etc. Revenue centers are sometimes referred to as "profit centers".

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: For changes to the number of revenue centers to take effect, workstation data ned to be re-created. (Server Control > Workstation > All Workstation Data)
{% endhint %}

#### Number of Modes

Select a multiple of 4 modes up to a maximum of 32. Modes can be used in many different ways. Typically, modes represent price points for sales items.

#### Number of Tables

This field refers to the number of tables, and the actual table numbers, used in the Maitre'D POS system. A maximum of 9,999 tables is available. If you intend to create sections, and assign numbers in each section, you could set up 500 tables and use 101, 102, 103 ... for section 1 and 201, 202, 203 ... for section 2. Order numbers begin with the next number after the number programmed here. (e.g. # of tables = 500 order # begin at 501).

#### Non Taxable

From the drop-down list, select a 0% tax that will be assigned to non-taxable divisions. This entry will also be used to replace the usual taxes on a check, for tax exempt customers.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: To use this feature, also enable the Non Taxable option in Point of Sale Control > Employees > Configuration > \[Select a Config] > Invoice.
{% endhint %}

#### Check \#

This field cannot be modified. On a new installation or following a sales deletion, this value will be set to 100000. This value will increase by 1 every time a check is printed. In normal use, this field tells you what is the last check number that was printed by Maitre'D and gives a rough idea of how many checks were printed since the first day the system was used.

#### Language

Select the main language to be used at the point of sale workstations. This will be the default language that is used on the POS screens before the employee logs in. For this language to also be used after the employee logs in, enable the Main Language option from Point of Sale Control > Employees > Employees > \[Select employee] > POS Operation > Option.

#### Second Language

Select an alternate language to be used by employees after they logon to the POS workstation.

For the second language to also be used after the employee logs in, disable the Main Language option from Point of Sale Control > Employees > Employees > \[Select employee] > POS Operation > Option.

Related Topics

1. [Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/accessing-options-for-the-point-of-sale-control-module)
2. [POS Control - Configuration](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration)
3. [POS Control - Configuration > Option](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
4. [POS Control - Configuration > POS](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
5. [POS Control - Check](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-check)
6. [POS Control - Printing](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-printing)
7. [POS Control - Security](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-security)
8. [POS Control - Gratuity Distribution](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-gratuity-distribution)
9. [POS Control - Home Page](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-home-page)

[Page](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/Chap04_POS_Control/02-Options/POSControl-HomePage.htm)


# POS Control - Configuration > Option

<figure><img src="/files/ockHjsoIFFyhMHoUJ8Ae" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Permanent Meters

Enable this option to update Sales Units in real time and appear in the meter section on the server financial report. The servers can declare the value of the meters at the start and end of their shift. Otherwise, Permanent Meters will not be functional.

#### 30 Minutes Meter Interval

The detailed meter report contains meters sold by 15 minutes intervals. Enable this option to have the report in 30 minutes intervals instead.

#### Bar Code with Price

Enable this option to use the price encoded within the barcode instead of the price defined in the sales item setup.

The first digit of the barcode must be 2 and the first seven digits are tested to find the corresponding items. Digits 8 through 11 are used as the item price. See the UPC guideline # 11 for more details on barcodes.

#### Manual Sales Item Cost

Enable this option to manually enter the sales item cost for each item, in Point of Sale Control > Revenue Center > Items Setup... > \[Select an item] > Configuration > \[Select a configuration] > Price and Cost > Cost. Leave this options disabled to use the cost value calculated by the Inventory Management module.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This option works only if the Inventory Management Module is available on your Maitre'D License.
{% endhint %}

#### Daily Deposit

Enable this option to request the daily deposit before starting the end of day. When the end of day is started, the user will automatically be prompted to enter a daily deposit amount. The amount entered will appear in the daybook reports with the daily balance.

#### PLU Mandatory

Enable this option to force the entry of a PLU code link every time a new sales item is created.

#### 24 hours Operation

Enable this option for businesses that operate 24 hours a day. This will allow the end of day to run with open checks or tables. Any open checks or tables are automatically transferred to the next fiscal day.

#### European Operation

Enable this option to calculate inclusive taxes for the European, UK and Australian markets.

#### VAT Calculation

Enable this option to calculate the Value Added Tax on the invoice total instead of per item.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The European Operation option also need to be enabled.
{% endhint %}

#### Meal Counting

Enable this option to count the number of meals on the activity report. For more information on counting the Number of Meals, refer to the Items Setup Options. Disable this option to display the customer count on the activity report instead. (Servers enter the number of customers when they enter orders.)

#### Table Assignment

Enable this option to have the Hostess function manage the sections of the restaurant, including table verification, floor plan, section assignment, smoking status, number of customers seated and seating availability. Otherwise, the Hostess function will work in the "Control Buffet" mode.

#### Alternate Discount Calculation

You can calculate Item/Division discounts with two inclusive taxes using the same method as in European Operation option. With this option enabled, Maitre'D extracts the inclusive taxes from the sales item price before the discount is calculated. With this option disabled, Maitre'D calculates the discount before extracting the inclusive taxes.

#### Multiple Fast Cash Key

Enable this option to allow the use of Fast Cash buttons lower than the check total multiple times. Every time a Fast Cash button is touched, if the button is not enough to close the invoice, this amount will be cumulated with the next Fast Cash button. Once the total cumulated amount is enough to cover the check total, the payment will be accepted.

#### Reactivate Temp. Withdrawn Items at the EOD

Activate this option to disable the Temporary Withdrawal option of all items for the next fiscal day so that they can be sold again from the External Order System (EOS) and the Points of Sales.

#### Auto close external orders at EOD

Activate this option to automatically close external (web) orders during the End-of-Day process. This will only affect orders which already have a payment applied. Unpaid orders will remain open.

Related Topics

1. [Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/accessing-options-for-the-point-of-sale-control-module)
2. [POS Control - Configuration](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration)
3. [POS Control - Configuration > Option](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
4. [POS Control - Configuration > POS](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
5. [POS Control - Check](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-check)
6. [POS Control - Printing](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-printing)
7. [POS Control - Security](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-security)
8. [POS Control - Gratuity Distribution](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-gratuity-distribution)
9. [POS Control - Home Page](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-home-page)


# POS Control - Configuration > POS

<figure><img src="/files/UxI64EElQIgvBeXdk8QJ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Update Button

Enable this option to display the Update button on the main screen of the workstation. This button allows to update the workstation after changes to the system from the Back-Office have been made. The Update button allows to update without having to open or access a guest check.

#### Items without Quantity

Enable this option to display the items separately. This option is useful if you setup an automatic item discount of type two for one or many for one. These discounts work only if the quantity stays at one. Leave it disabled to allow the items to have a modifiable quantity.

#### Enable Media Screen Calculator

Enable this option to allow the use of the plus (+) and multiply (\*) buttons on the media amount entry screen to use multiple instances of the same media type. For example, if you have 2 gift certificates of different amounts, you can use the plus button to add them together and enter a total amount of gift certificates, instead of manually adding 2 amounts before entering their total at the workstation.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This feature also allows the use of the plus (+) button on the Promotion Amount screen to add multiple instances of the same discount.
{% endhint %}

#### Release Confirmation

Enable this option for the system to prompt you with a confirmation message ("yes" or "no") when you manually attempt to release a table.

#### One Touch Login

Enable this option to quickly choose an employee from a list displayed on the workstation instead of entering the employee number every time.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: If the employee list is not displayed, press the ENTER button on the server number screen.
{% endhint %}

#### Cash Rounding

Enable this option in markets where low-denomination coins were removed from circulation, like Canada and Australia. With this option enabled, cash transactions are rounded to the nearest multiple of $0.05. The rounding is displayed on the Amount Received and Change screens, and printed on the Check and Receipt. Transactions made with payment cards, gift cards or other methods of payment are unaffected.

#### Use Volume Modifier

Enable this option to enable the replacement of the Tare option by the Volume Modifier option for liquor control when setting an item's function as Price Rolled Up.

#### Automatically Upsize Modifier

Enable this option not to prompt for modifiers again when upsizing a main item with modifiers.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: If these modifiers are setup with their own upsizes, they will be used. If not, they will remain the same.
{% endhint %}

#### Open Price Auto Override

Enable this option to force item with the Open Price option to be ordered at their default price point without displaying the numeric keypad. This allows third-party interfaces to change prices for those items in the back-office without affecting items that have previously been ordered on checks or bar tabs that are still open.

#### Sort Discounts Alphabetically

Enable this option to sort the list of discounts alphabetically on the point of sale. If this option is left disabled, the discounts will be sorted by their internal ID number.

#### Use advanced POS UI

Enable this option to use the high-definition, HTML-Based user interface for point of sale workstations. Disable this option to keep using the legacy user interface.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The Advanced POS UI requires more resources than the Legacy POS UI. Use of the Advanced POS UI is recommended with high-end POS hardware.
{% endhint %}

#### Display Delay

Enter the number of seconds after the end of the transaction before the line display shows the promotion lines setup in Point of Sale Control > Revenue Center > Options > Messages.

#### Report Time-out

Enter the number of seconds after the request for an external custom Crystal Report on the workstation before displaying a Timeout During Report Generation prompt.

#### Service Speed Data

Enter the number of days that will be available for the service speed report, in the report center. Valid values are between 30 and 365, inclusively.

Related Topics

1. [Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/accessing-options-for-the-point-of-sale-control-module)
2. [POS Control - Configuration](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration)
3. [POS Control - Configuration > Option](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
4. [POS Control - Configuration > POS](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
5. [POS Control - Check](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-check)
6. [POS Control - Printing](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-printing)
7. [POS Control - Security](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-security)
8. [POS Control - Gratuity Distribution](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-gratuity-distribution)
9. [POS Control - Home Page](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-home-page)


# POS Control - Check

<figure><img src="/files/qOcpBc2BXCh4Uc2djKGD" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Detailed Check

Enable this option so that the Print Check screen on the touchscreen workstation includes an option allowing servers to print the totals by customer.

#### Tax on Receipt

Enable this option to print taxes on the receipt.

#### Receipt Without Amount

Enable this option so that payment receipts do not contain any amounts pertaining to the total due or payment media used. Otherwise, the normal receipt is printed with the amount of the guest check.

#### Print Bar Code on Check

Enable this option to print the invoice number in a bar code format. The check can be recognized using a bar code scanner at the terminal.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: Make sure that the printer can print bar codes by configuring appropriate settings under Point of Sale Control > Workstation > Printer Type > Setup.
{% endhint %}

#### Print When Discount is Applied

Enable this option to force the printout of a receipt every time a discount is applied to a check.

#### Print Inclusive Tax Total

Enable this option to show the total of the inclusive taxes above the check total.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This is printed only if the taxes do not have the Separate Printout option enabled in Point of Sale Control > Payments > Taxes > Options.
{% endhint %}

#### Amount in Literal Format

Enable this option to spell out the total amount on every invoice, as required in Mexico.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: You also need to set the Language field to Second Language and the Second Language field to Espanol in Point of Sale Control > View > Options > Configuration.
{% endhint %}

#### Special Menu Printout

Enable this option to print main priced items separately from included components and regular sales items on the guest's check when Special Menu Settings are validated.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The Use Special Menu option must also be enabled in Point of Sale Control > Employees > Configuration > Order > Special Menu. Also, Combos are not compatible with this option.
{% endhint %}

#### Closed Check Reprint

Enable this option to reprint a fully detailed duplicate of a closed check with the settlement information when touching the Print button on the Close screen, instead of only a receipt with the total and settlement.

#### No Invoice Printing

Enable this option to prevent guest checks from printing.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This option cannot be used in jurisdictions where any form of Sales Recording Module or fiscal printer is required. Please check with local fiscal authorities before using this option.
{% endhint %}

Related Topics

1. [Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/accessing-options-for-the-point-of-sale-control-module)
2. [POS Control - Configuration](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration)
3. [POS Control - Configuration > Option](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
4. [POS Control - Configuration > POS](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
5. [POS Control - Check](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-check)
6. [POS Control - Printing](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-printing)
7. [POS Control - Security](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-security)
8. [POS Control - Gratuity Distribution](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-gratuity-distribution)
9. [POS Control - Home Page](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-home-page)


# POS Control - Printing

<figure><img src="/files/03rPMeVqgN8GQbyyxc62" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

### Automatic Redirection Table

Enable this option to use redirection table to direct the printing route of various logical printer per mode.

#### Redirection Table by Revenue Center

Enable this option to use automatic redirection table by revenue center instead of mode.

#### Separate Course

Enable this option to print the courses on separated chits on the shared printers. Disable it to print them on the same chit.

#### Alternate Printout

Enable this option to use a slightly different looking check printout.

#### Condensed Printout

Enable this option to remove any extraneous line feeds on checks and reduce the amount of paper used.

#### Re-Open Check Without Kitchen Printing

Enable this option to eliminate the printing of previously ordered items in the kitchen when reopening a closed check.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: Both the Void Item and Cancel/Re-Open Check options must be enabled in Point of Sale Control > Employees > Configuration > Invoice > Cancellation.
{% endhint %}

#### Media on Bartender Invoice&#x20;

Enable this option to get the same check settlement information on checks and receipts generated by a Bartender as on those generated with the Fast-Food and Order functions, with the mandatory amount tender on a running bill opened with a customer name.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: If the Print button is used, the check prints normally and does not reprint when applying payment.
{% endhint %}

#### Special Menu Printout

Enable this option to print the control items indented under the included sales items on the kitchen coupon when Special Menu Settings are validated.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The Alternate Printout option above must also be enabled, as well as the Use Special Menu option in Point of Sale Control > Employees > Configuration > Order > Special Menu.
{% endhint %}

#### Modifier Exception Printing

Enable this option to allow modifiers attached to a main item to control how the item is printed on kitchen printers. For example, a revenue item could be configured not to print on any kitchen printers. However, if a modifier is ordered with that item and that the modifier is set to print to the kitchen, the main item would then be printed at the same printer as its modifier.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: Items that are affected by modifier exception printing will be printed separately, even if compilation is in use.
{% endhint %}

#### Print Revenue Items as Modifiers

Enable this option to ensure that revenue items ordered as modifiers are properly placed under the main item that called them on the kitchen chit.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This option is especially useful when working with combo meals, where revenue items are treated as modifiers under the main combo item.
{% endhint %}

#### Print Modifiers to All Printers

Enable this option to ensure that revenue items prints to all printers configured for that item, even if ordered as a modifier.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This option is especially useful when working with combo meals, where revenue items are treated as modifiers under the main combo item.
{% endhint %}

***

### Mobile Printing

These options apply to print jobs coming from mobile devices such as Adroid or iOS tablets.

#### Workstation

Select the workstation that is responsible for handling print jobs send by mobile devices.

#### Polling

Set the polling interval (in seconds) at which the workstation will check for print jobs from mobile devices.

***

### EFR Server

These settings apply to systems using the EFSTA Fiscal Register to record sales data and print fiscal signatures on receipts.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: Set the proper Sales Recording Module in System Configuration > View > Options > Devices.
{% endhint %}

### Port

Type the TCP port number used by the EFR server. The default value is 5618. However, please verify the actual setting in your EFR server installation to be sure to use the correct value.

#### Print QR-Code

Enable this option to print a QR code containing the fiscal data on the receipt.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: To print QR Codes, an ESC/POS Compatible printer must be used. The printer also needs to support QR Codes specifically. Older printer models, such as the Epson TM-T88III does not support QR Codes. QR Codes are supported by the TM-T88IV or later models.

ESC/POS codes also need to be configured in Point of Sale Control > Workstation > Printer Type... > \[your printer] > QR Code.
{% endhint %}

Related Topics

1. [Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/accessing-options-for-the-point-of-sale-control-module)
2. [POS Control - Configuration](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration)
3. [POS Control - Configuration > Option](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
4. [POS Control - Configuration > POS](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
5. [POS Control - Check](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-check)
6. [POS Control - Printing](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-printing)
7. [POS Control - Security](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-security)
8. [POS Control - Gratuity Distribution](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-gratuity-distribution)
9. [POS Control - Home Page](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-home-page)


# POS Control - Security

<figure><img src="/files/P7pid1ftvcWvFWEuxm4B" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

***

### Options

#### Unassigned Waiter Card

Enable this option to allow the use of pre-programmed card for employees. The Maitre'D will look for the password associated with that card instead of the server number and password. Make sure that you are using a card with a password that is not currently used by another valid server because the system will use the first employee that is using this password in the employee database.

#### Manager Takeover

Enable this option enable the Manager Takeover functionality. This gives the managers the possibility to momentarily take over a table already accessed by another employee without having to exit from the table and re-enter it.

**Security Level**

Enable this option to use up to 6 security levels. "6" is the highest and "1" is the lowest. These security levels control entry to the system's employee files.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: You can configure an individual's security level in the Security field in Time & Attendance > File > Employee.
{% endhint %}

**Server Assignment**

Enable this option to assign servers to a specific Point of Sales. If you assign an employee to a workstation, he will only be able to work from that Point of Sales. The employees that are not assigned will be able to use all workstations. The selected Point of Sales an employee is allowed to work on is saved in the Workstation field of Point of Sale Control / Employees / Employees... / POS Operation.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: For a Manager or Head Server to use this feature from the workstation, enable both the Manager Functions option in Point of Sale Control > Employee > Configuration > Functions as well as the Assign Waiter option in Point of Sale Control > Employees > Configuration > Functions > Setup.
{% endhint %}

**Use Security Algorithm**

Enable this option to print on every guest's check a Security Algorithm number required for fiscal verification.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This option is to be used only in Belgium.
{% endhint %}

**Force Employee Card Swipe**

Enable this option to force employees to use their magnetic cards, and disable their passwords.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: It is not possible to use magnetic cards for employees and biometrics devices on the same system. Also, this option disables the Change Password function on the workstation.
{% endhint %}

**Generate Text File**

Click this button to create a security file in Belgium.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This button is available only if the Use Security Algorithm is enabled. You can specify a location to save this file in the Security Files Path line of System Configuration > View > Options > Directories. This button is not used in El Salvador.
{% endhint %}

***

### Biometric

#### Biometric Log on Only

Enable this option to force employees to use the biometrics device, and disable their passwords.

**Biometric T\&A Punch Only**

Enable this option to force employees to use the biometrics device when they punch in, and disable the server's passwords, even if the employee record is linked to a server number and that server number does not need the biometrics device to order.

**Biometric as Validation Device**

Enable this option to use the biometrics device only to validate an employee's identity instead of a password. The employee will still have to enter his server number on the workstation to identify himself, but when the password is required, he will touch the biometrics device instead of entering his password. The same will apply when punching in or out with the Time & Attendance module.

**Display Acquired Fingerprint**

Enable this option to show on screen the real fingerprint scanned instead of a default generic image during the biometrics capture.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This option is only available with the Authentec Biometrics Reader device.
{% endhint %}

***

### Time Out Delay

#### POS Inactivity

Enter the inactivity delay, in minutes, before the workstation will exit any table screen a server has left open for a long period of time, and comes back to the server Login screen. If there are items selected but yet to be ordered, or if the screen is currently displaying the hostess' floor plan, the workstation will not go back to the Login screen. Setting this field to 0 will disable this feature.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This field can be superseded by the Inactivity Override and Inactivity Seconds fields of Point of Sale Control > Employees > Configuration > General, but this Inactivity Minutes field must be different than Zero (0) for these two other fields to take effect.
{% endhint %}

**Drawer Warning**

Enter the inactivity delay, in second, before the workstation will start beeping if the cash drawer is left open for a long period of time. Setting this field to 0 will disable this feature.

Related Topics

1. [Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/accessing-options-for-the-point-of-sale-control-module)
2. [POS Control - Configuration](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration)
3. [POS Control - Configuration > Option](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
4. [POS Control - Configuration > POS](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
5. [POS Control - Check](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-check)
6. [POS Control - Printing](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-printing)
7. [POS Control - Security](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-security)
8. [POS Control - Gratuity Distribution](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-gratuity-distribution)
9. [POS Control - Home Page](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-home-page)


# POS Control - Gratuity Distribution

<figure><img src="/files/kANT9iED5IHj0Al0KaKk" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

***

### Gratuity Distribution

Enable this option to print the percentages of tips owed to other employees on the server's reading.

#### Assistant

Enter the percentage used to calculate the amount owed to the buss people. This percentage is applied on the Net Sales.

#### Host

Enter the percentage used to calculate the amount owed to the employees seating guests. This percentage is applied on the Net Sales.

#### Transfer

Enter the percentage used to calculate the amount owed to other employees in the same section. This percentage is applied on sales transferred from any other employee.

#### Division

Enter the percentage used to calculate the amount owed to Bartenders. This percentage is applied on divisions where the Gratuity Distribution option is enabled.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: To use a division in this calculation, enable the Gratuity Distribution option in Point of Sale Control > Revenue Center > Division > Option.
{% endhint %}

***

### Calculation Type

Select the type of sales figures to use as a base for the calculation of the gratuity distribution.

#### Net Sales

Select Net Sales if the gratuity distribution should be calculated based on the sales without taxes.

#### Gross Sales

Select Gross Sales if the gratuity distribution should be calculated based on the sales including taxes.

Related Topics

1. [Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/accessing-options-for-the-point-of-sale-control-module)
2. [POS Control - Configuration](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration)
3. [POS Control - Configuration > Option](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
4. [POS Control - Configuration > POS](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
5. [POS Control - Check](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-check)
6. [POS Control - Printing](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-printing)
7. [POS Control - Security](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-security)
8. [POS Control - Gratuity Distribution](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-gratuity-distribution)
9. [POS Control - Home Page](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-home-page)


# POS Control - Home Page

<figure><img src="/files/xRXfZyFzbo9HPnUKof41" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

***

### Use Default

Enable this option to use the built-in default local home page for the Point of Sale Control module.

#### Address

The Use Default option needs to be disabled for this field to become accessible. Enter the URL of the webpage that will be used to replace the default local home page for the Point of Sale Control module.

***

### Maitre'D Databoard Identification

#### User name

Enter the user name to access the Maitre'D Databoard server.

#### Password

Enter the password to access the Maitre'D Databoard server.

**Confirm Password**

Confirm the password to access the Maitre'D Databoard server.

Related Topics

1. [Accessing Options for the Point of Sale Control Module](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/accessing-options-for-the-point-of-sale-control-module)
2. [POS Control - Configuration](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration)
3. [POS Control - Configuration > Option](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
4. [POS Control - Configuration > POS](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-configuration-greater-than-pos)
5. [POS Control - Check](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-check)
6. [POS Control - Printing](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-printing)
7. [POS Control - Security](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-security)
8. [POS Control - Gratuity Distribution](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-gratuity-distribution)
9. [POS Control - Home Page](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/point-of-sale-control-module/pos-control-home-page)


# Taxes

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Setting up Taxes Overview</td><td><a href="/pages/17ATaiLDhslhUug4yYMB">/pages/17ATaiLDhslhUug4yYMB</a></td></tr><tr><td>Sequence for configuring taxes</td><td><a href="/pages/We55oN7cLsXZX6CHiQET">/pages/We55oN7cLsXZX6CHiQET</a></td></tr><tr><td>Create Tax Categories</td><td><a href="/pages/9GqdRtjN4FlZFZE2jbtk">/pages/9GqdRtjN4FlZFZE2jbtk</a></td></tr><tr><td>Create Taxes</td><td><a href="/pages/9nrsMYoCgAqZruUn10dL">/pages/9nrsMYoCgAqZruUn10dL</a></td></tr><tr><td>Assign Taxes to Divisions</td><td><a href="/pages/wWYZIXszyCOH6jIimnSx">/pages/wWYZIXszyCOH6jIimnSx</a></td></tr><tr><td>British Columbia Soda Tax</td><td><a href="/pages/azhlTUUvLnNXsYmbc88D">/pages/azhlTUUvLnNXsYmbc88D</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Setting up Taxes Overview

Maitre'D offers a flexible tax management system that allows restaurants to automate all tax management functions and to run accurate reports on taxes. The following are some of the features that can be configured in Maitre'D.

***

### Fixed Tax

In certain areas, regulations require that a fixed amount surcharge be charged on top of the regular tax. Maitre'D can be programmed to apply a fixed amount surcharge on top of the usual taxes. Reports can be generated to view the amount of fixed tax versus the amount of regular tax that was collected.

***

### Inclusive or Exclusive Tax Calculation

Maitre'D can calculate taxes inclusively, which means that the price of an item already contains the tax and Maitre'D will calculate backwards to extract the tax amount and the price of the item. The other method is exclusive tax calculation, which means that Maitre'D will apply the tax rate on the item price.

***

### Rounding Function

When performing calculations, printing and calculating amounts, Maitre'D can round off numbers to the closest cent. The rounding function will drop the digits after the cents. For example, 10.33445 will become 10.33. Similarly, 10.349999 will be rounded up to 10.35.

***

### Gross or Net Calculation Method

When using the inclusive options, the tax calculation can be done based on either the gross or net calculation method. If the system calculates the tax using the gross method, then the tax rate is applied to the gross total of the products. The net calculation method will supply the tax rate from the total, assuming that the item prices already include the taxes.

***

### Separate Printout

If more than one tax is applied to the total, then Maitre'D can print the total tax on one line on the check, or to print each tax amount on a separate line. For example, if a state or province tax as well as a federal tax are applied to the total amount, then the check can either show the total of the two taxes on one line, or each tax amount can be shown on separate lines on the check.

***

### Tax Before Quantity

For items that are ordered in multiple quantities, the tax rate can be applied to a single unit and then the tax amount can be multiplied by the quantity, or the item price can be multiplied by the quantity and then the tax rate is applied to the total.

***

### Tax On Tax

In certain states or provinces, the state/province tax is applied on the total of the item subtotal and the federal tax. In other words, the state/province taxes the federal tax. Maitre'D supports all tax on tax configurations.

***

### Taxable Service

Maitre'D can apply taxes on all service charges applied to a guest check such as regular service charges or delivery charges.

***

### Taxes On Discounts

When discounts are applied to the amount of a guest check, Maitre'D can calculate the tax based on the amount before the discount is applied or after the discount is applied. By charging the tax on the amount before the discount is applied, the guest will effectively pay tax on the discount amount. Depending on local regulations, this option can be configured accordingly.

***

### Taxable Gratuity

Any calculated gratuity that is part of the total amount can be taxed and recorded in Maitre'D

***

### Automatic Rate Change

A future rate change can be configured in Maitre'D before the effective date and will be applied as of the date specified by the user. For example, if the federal tax rate goes up from 7% to 7.5% at a certain date, then Maitre'D will start applying the rate of 7.5% at that date. This saves users the trouble of changing the rate only on a specific date, and also ensures that the restaurant does not forget to change it on the critical day.

***

### Tax Table Support

Certain states use tax tables to define their tax rates. Maitre'D offers full support for tax tables and custom tax tables can be set up.

***

### Grouping Taxes Using Tax Categories

Tax categories group taxes for reporting purposes and allow restaurants to generate tax reports to quickly determine how much tax was collected for each group. Examples of tax categories are food and liquor.


# Sequence for configuring taxes

When setting up taxes in Maitre'D, following a logical sequence will make the work easier. It will also avoid having to go back-and-forth between various configurations to achieve the desired result.

The general steps are:

1. Research and understand local tax laws.
2. Determine how taxes need to be grouped for reporting, and create the required tax categories in Maitre'D.
3. Create taxes in Maitre'D.
4. Assign taxes to Divisions in Maitre'D.

***

### 1. Research and understand local tax laws

This is the first and most important step. Understanding the local tax regulation will ensure that taxes will be configured properly in Maitre'D. The Maitre'D tax calculation engine is powerful and flexible. To be able to select the appropriate options for your region, you first need to understand the regulation thoroughly. Here are some general guidelines:

#### Determine which taxes and rates are applicable

Some jurisdictions have federal taxes, provincial taxes, liquor taxes and even special taxes on sodas or sweetened beverages. Some areas apply taxes on food items, while others don't. Some areas have variable tax rates based on whether the food is consumed on-premises (dine-in) or off-premises (take-out).

#### Determine how taxes will be calculated

Taxes can be added to the price of an item (add-on tax) or can be included in the list price of the item (inclusive tax). Also, some areas may require that the tax be calculated on an individual item before being multiplied by the quantity of items purchased (tax before quantity).  It is also important to understand how rounding works. Most areas calculate rounding to the nearest cent ($0.01) while some simply truncate everything after the second decimal.&#x20;

***

### 2. Create Tax Categories in Maitre'D

Once you understand how taxes work in your area, you need to determine how taxes will be grouped for reporting purposes. Taxes are grouped together using Tax Categories in Maitre'D.  Every tax needs to belong to a tax category. Here are some common tax category examples:

* Federal Tax
* Provincial Tax
* State Tax
* Liquor Tax
* Food Tax

***

### 3. Create taxes in Maitre'D

Create each tax in Maitre'D. Each tax will be assigned to a tax category and configured according to local tax laws.

***

### 4. Assign taxes to Divisions in Maitre'D

Each Division in Maitre'D can have up to 2 taxes. When divisions are created in Maitre'D, care should be taken to group similar items together. Generally speaking, similar items should have the same taxes applied to them.


# Create Tax Categories

Tax Categories are used to group taxes together for reporting purposes. All taxes need to belong to a tax category, so at least one tax category must exist in the Maitre'D database.

### Examples of common tax categories:

* Federal Tax
* Provincial Tax
* State Tax
* Liquor Tax
* Food Tax

### Follow these steps to create tax categories:

1. Logon to the Maitre’D Back-Office with appropriate credentials. (Distributor or System Owner)

<figure><img src="/files/Tk5CN20t3BqkvTn7v0YU" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

![Maitre'D Logon Screen](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/MD_LogonScreen.gif)

2. Start the Point of Sale Control module.

![Back-Office Icon - Point of Sale Control](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_PointSales.svg)

3. Click on the Payments menu and select the Tax Category... option.

![Payments Menu - Tax Category](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/01-TaxCategoryMenu.png)

4. The list of existing tax categories will be displayed.

![Tax Category List](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/02-TaxCategoryList.png)

![Button - Modify](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Modify.jpg)

Select an existing Tax Category and click the Modify button to change its description.

![Button - Add](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Add.jpg)

Click the Add button to create a new Tax Category.

![Button - Print](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Print.jpg)

Click the Print button to generate a report with the complete list of Tax Categories, which can then be printed.

![Button - Close](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Close.jpg)

Click the Close button to close the list and return to the Point of Sale Control module.

5. When you click Add to create a new Tax Category or Modify to edit an existing one, the properties are displayed:

![Tax Category Description](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/03-NewTaxCat.png)

**Description**

Type a meaningful name for this Tax Category. (Up to 20 characters)

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click OK to save changes and exit.

![Button - Delete](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Delete\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click Delete to remove this Tax Category and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without making any changes.

6. The new Tax Category will appear in the list.

![Tax Category List](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/04-NewList.png)

Once all required Tax Categories are created, close this window using the Close button.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! Every tax that will be created needs to belong to a Tax Category. Therefore, at least one Tax Category must exist in the Maitre'D Database.
{% endhint %}


# Create Taxes

Before creating taxes, make sure that you understand your local tax laws and regulations. Also, remember that every tax you create in Maitre'D needs to belong to a Tax Category. Therefore, at least one Tax Category must exist in your Maitre'D Database.

***

### Process to create a new tax:

1. Logon to the Maitre’D Back-Office with appropriate credentials. (Distributor or System Owner)

<figure><img src="/files/OPxXU2H3aUcQEW9JIDKh" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

<figure><img src="/files/0okmhq0D8EWu7OB1iIQW" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

2. Start the Point of Sale Control module.

![Back-Office Icon - Point of Sale Control](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_PointSales.svg)

3. Click on the Payments menu and select the Taxes... option.

![Payments Menu - Taxes](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/05-TaxesMenu.png)

4. The list of existing taxes will be displayed:

![Taxes List](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/06-TaxList.png)

![Button - Modify](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Modify.jpg)

Select an existing tax and click the Modify button to edit the tax settings.

![Button - Add](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Add.jpg)

Click the Add button to create a new tax from scratch.

![Button - Print](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Print.jpg)

Click Print to generate a report of all available taxes, which can be printed.

![Button - Close](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Close.jpg)

Click Close to close this window and return to the Point of Sale Control module.

***

### Create Taxes - Setup Screen

When a new tax is created or when an existing tax is modified, the tax properties open on the Setup branch.

![New Tax - Setup](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/07a-TaxSetup.png)

**Description**

Type a meaningful description for the tax. You can use up to 20 characters. This description will appear on guest checks, POS reports and back-office reports.

**Category**

From the drop-down list, select the tax category which this tax belongs to.

**Fiscal Identification**

This field is used in Russia only. Type in the VAT entry number to use from the VAT table of the OPOS driver for the Spark 617TF fiscal printer.

**Tax Type**

This field is used in the province of Québec, Canada only. Select the appropriate tax type for the Québec Sales Recording module (SRM). If you are not located in Québec of if you are exempt from using the SRM, set this drop-down list to Undefined.

![Button - Delete](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Delete\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click Delete to remove this tax and return to the list of taxes.

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click OK to save changes and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

![Button - Apply](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Apply\(Reg\).gif)

Click Apply to save changes without exiting.

***

### Create Taxes - Fixed Tax

Fixed Tax branch:

![New Tax - Fixed Tax](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/07b-TaxFixedTax.png)

**Fixed Tax**

Enable this option if the tax being configured is a fixed amount rather than a percentage.

**Amount**

Enter the fixed amount to be charged as tax.

![Button - Delete](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Delete\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click Delete to remove this tax and return to the list of taxes.

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click OK to save changes and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

![Button - Apply](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Apply\(Reg\).gif)

Click Apply to save changes without exiting.

***

### Create Taxes - Rate

Rate branch:

![New Tax - Rate](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/07c-TaxRate.png)

**Current**

This section contains information on current tax parameters.

**Rate**

Type in the percentage of tax to apply to taxable items. The rate can be anything from 0% to 100%, with a precision up to 5 decimal places.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The value in the Rate field will be ignored if a Tax Table is used.
{% endhint %}

**Minimum Taxable**

Type in the minimum sales amount to reach for this tax to apply. If the sales amount is lower than the amount entered in this field, Maitre'D will not calculate taxes on this sale.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The value in the Minimum Taxable field will be ignored if this tax is configured as Inclusive.
{% endhint %}

**Special Mode Tax**

From the drop-down list, select the replacement tax that will apply when using modes with the Special Tax option enabled. This is especially useful for jurisdictions where a different tax rate is applied based on dine-in or take-out food.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The option to determine whether a mode will use the default tax or the special mode tax is located in Point of Sale Control > Revenue Center > Options > \[Select Revenue Center] > Configuration > Modes.
{% endhint %}

**Upcoming**

This section contains information on future tax parameters. Use this section if an upcoming tax modification is expected in the near future. This will ensure that the new parameters automatically come into effect at the prescribed date.

**Rate**

Type in the new percentage of tax that will apply to taxable items. The rate can be anything from 0% to 100%, with a precision up to 5 decimal places.

**Minimum Taxable**

Type in the new minimum sales amount to reach for this tax to apply. If the sales amount is lower than the amount entered in this field, Maitre'D will not calculate taxes on this sale.

**Date**

Select the date at which the new tax parameters will become effective.

![Button - Delete](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Delete\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click Delete to remove this tax and return to the list of taxes.

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click OK to save changes and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

![Button - Apply](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Apply\(Reg\).gif)

Click Apply to save changes without exiting.

***

### Tax Table

Tax Table branch:

![New Tax - Tax Table](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/07d-TaxTaxTable.png)

**Use Tax Table**

Enable this option to use a tax table instead of a tax rate.

**Repeat At**

Enter the tax amount corresponding to the start of the repetitive cycle of the tax table. A repetitive cycle is when the range of cents taxed starts a consistent pattern. Maitre'D will repeat the tax brackets table starting with this tax amount, after the tax amount set in the Last Entry field below.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: You must have a value of at least 0.01 in this field, without reaching over to the amount entered in the Last Entry field below.
{% endhint %}

**Last Entry**

Enter the tax amount corresponding to the last position of the table to be filled. Maitre'D will repeat the tax brackets table after this tax amount, starting with at the tax amount set in the Repeat At field above.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: You can have a value of at most 1.00 in this field, without reaching under to the amount entered in the Repeat At field above.
{% endhint %}

![Button - Tax Bracket](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-TaxBracket.gif)

Click the Tax Bracket... button to access the tax table and modify each entry in the table. You will need the tax table provided by your local tax authorities for this task.

![Tax Table - Tax Bracket](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/07d2-TaxTaxTableTable.png)

![Button - Modify](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Modify.jpg)

Select an entry from the tax table and click Modify to edit its properties.

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click OK to save changes and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

When you click Modify on a tax bracket, configure as follows:

![Tax Bracket](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/07e-TaxTaxBracket.png)

**Tax**

The amount of tax to be applied for each bracket.

**From**

As the \[To] amount of each tax level is entered, the lowest \[From] amount of the next tax level is automatically set to this top amount plus one cent.

**To**

Enter the highest amount on which this tax level applies.

![Button - Delete](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Delete\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click Delete to remove this tax and return to the list of taxes.

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click OK to save changes and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

![Button - Apply](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Apply\(Reg\).gif)

Click Apply to save changes without exiting.

***

## Options

Options branch:

![New Tax - Options](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/07e-TaxOptions.png)

**Inclusive**

Maitre'D uses this field with a tax rate, but not with tax tables. If you select this option, Maitre'D will include the tax on the check's item line, but it will separate the tax from the total at the bottom of the check as well as on the Back-Office reports. If this option is disabled, Maitre'D will not include the tax in the item's price.

Here is an example of how the inclusive tax works: The check shows a tax of 10 cents on a soft drink that is priced at $2,00, as it appears on the item line. However, the Back-Office report will show that the item's actual price is $1.90 and the tax 10 cents (which amounts to the $2.00 found on the item line of the check). Therefore, when setting the price of the sales item, you will need to set the soft drink price at $2.00.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: Enabling or disabling the Inclusive option also automatically enables or disables the Tax before Quantity option.
{% endhint %}

**Check Total**

If you enable this option, Maitre'D will compare the total amount of all items on the check to the minimum taxable amount. Otherwise, Maitre'D will compare the total amount of all items associated with a given tax to the minimum taxable amount.

**Rounding**

Enable this option to round to the nearest cent. For example, 3.2 cents will be rounded to 3 cents, and 5.8 cents will be rounded to 6 cents. If this option is disabled, Maitre'D will cut off the last digits to form a whole cent. For example, 3.2 cents will be truncated to 3 cents, but 5.8 cents will also be truncated to only 5 cents.

**Gross Method**

This field applies to inclusive tax only. If this option is enabled, Maitre'D will use the gross method to calculate inclusive tax; otherwise, Maitre'D will use the net method to find out the inclusive tax. Here are a few examples of how the gross and net methods work:

**The Gross Method**

The item price is $10.00. The tax is 7%. Maitre'D uses this formula to determine the tax: 10.00 \* .07 = $ 0.70

**The Net Method**

The item price is again $10.00 and the tax is 7%. Maitre'D uses this formula to determine the tax: 10.00 - (10.00 /1.07) = $ 0.65

**Separate Printout**

If this option is enabled and more than one tax is applied to a check, Maitre'D will print each amount on a separate line along with a description. If it is disabled, Maitre'D will accumulate the total of all taxes and print the total on one line with the description "TAX". For Inclusive taxes, this option only determines wether the total included tax amount is printed or not.

**Tax Before Quantity**

This field applies to inclusive tax only. If this option is enabled, Maitre'D will calculate the tax for a single item, and then multiply the tax by the quantity. If it is disabled, Maitre'D will calculate the tax but only after the price has been multiplied by the quantity.

**BC Soda Beverage Tax**

Enable this option to activate the calculation method that is specific to the Soda Beverage tax applicable in the Canadian province of British Columbia. Enabling this option also allows you to use the BC Soda Beverages Tax options located in the Tax branch of each division.

![Button - Delete](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Delete\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click Delete to remove this tax and return to the list of taxes.

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click OK to save changes and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

![Button - Apply](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Apply\(Reg\).gif)

Click Apply to save changes without exiting.

***

### Apply Tax On

Apply Tax On branch:

![New Tax - Apply Tax On](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/07f-TaxApplyTaxOn.png)

**Taxes the Tax**

This option is effective only if 2 taxes apply on a division, and only for the tax defined in the Tax #2 field of that division.

If this option is enabled, Maitre'D will calculate the amount of the second tax based on the sales amount plus the first tax. For example, suppose you have to apply a federal tax then a state tax to sales items. If you enabled this option, Maitre'D will include the federal tax in the amount used to calculate the state tax. If this option is disabled, Maitre'D will only calculate the state tax using the sales amount.

**Taxable Discount**

Enable this option to calculate the tax before any discounts are applied on a check. If this option is disabled, taxes will be calculated on the discounted price.

**Taxable Service**

Enable this option to calculate the tax on service charges added to the check. If this option is disabled, the Service Charge will not be taxed.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The Service Charge is configured in Point of Sale Control / Payments / Tips & Service... / \[select revenue center] / Service.
{% endhint %}

**Tax on Delivery Charges**

Enable this option to calculate the tax on Delivery Charges added to the check. If this option is disabled, the Delivery Charge will not be taxed.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The delivery charge is often considered as a service. In many jurisdictions, the delivery charge is affected by the same rules as a service charge. Delivery charges are configured in the Delivery module.
{% endhint %}

**Tax on Charged Discount**

Enable this option to calculate the tax on charged discounts added to the check. If this option is disabled, the charged discounts will not be taxed.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: This option has no effect if the tax is inclusive.
{% endhint %}

**Taxable Gratuity**

Enable this option to calculate the tax on gratuity added to the check. If this option is disabled, the gratuity will not be taxed.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The gratuity is configured in Point of Sale Control / Payments / Tips & Service... / \[select revenue center] / Gratuity.
{% endhint %}

![Button - Delete](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Delete\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click Delete to remove this tax and return to the list of taxes.

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click OK to save changes and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

![Button - Apply](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Apply\(Reg\).gif)

Click Apply to save changes without exiting.


# Assign Taxes to Divisions

In Maitre'D, taxes are assigned at the division level. It is not possible to assign taxes to individual items. Before you begin, make sure that division categories and divisions are created in your Maitre'D database.

***

### To assign taxes to divisions:

1. Logon to the Maitre’D Back-Office with appropriate credentials. (Distributor or System Owner)

<figure><img src="/files/nBRNBzvi7GE82cYaSUd0" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

![Maitre'D Logon Screen](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/MD_LogonScreen.gif)

2. Start the Point of Sale Control module.

![Back-Office Icon - Point of Sale Control](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_PointSales.svg)

3. Click on the Revenue Center menu and select the Divisions... option.

![Menu - Revenue Center - Divisions](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/08-Div1.png)

4. The list of divisions will appear.

![Divisions List](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/09-Div2.png)

![Button - Modify](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Modify.jpg)

Select an existing division and click the Modify button to  edit the division's properties.

![Button - Add](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Add.jpg)

Click the Add button to create a new division.

![Button - Print](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Print.jpg)

Click the Print button to generate a report which can be printed.

![Button - Close](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Close.jpg)

Click the Close button to exit the divisions list and return to the Point of Sale Control module.

5. Edit an existing division, and click on the Tax branch.

![Division - Tax Branch](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/09-Div3-TAX.png)

**Tax #1**

From the drop-down list, select the first tax that applies to this division.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: If a division is not taxable, create a 0% tax called "Non Taxable" (or similar) and select it in this first tax field.
{% endhint %}

**Tax #2**

From the drop-down list, select a second tax, if required. Tax 2# applies after the first tax (Tax #1).

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: If no second tax applies, select Undefined from the drop-down list.
{% endhint %}

**BC Soda Beverages Tax**

The options in this section will only become available if one of the selected taxes has the option BC Soda Beverage Tax enabled, in Point of Sale Control / Payments / Taxes / \[select tax] / Option. These options should be used only by merchants located in the Canadian province of British Columbia.

The purpose of these settings is to configure the calculation of the BC Soda Beverage Tax for taxable items that are part of combo meals or included with other items that are not taxable. When a taxable item is part of a combo and not sold separately, the BC Soda Beverage Tax is calculated on the lesser value between $3.00 or 50% of the sale price of the combo.

**Maximum Amount**

Enter the maximum amount that will be used as a base sale price for the calculation of the BC Soda Beverage Tax on an item that is part of a combo meal or included with another item.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: From April 1st, 2021, this value needs to be set at $3.00.
{% endhint %}

**Maximum Percentage**

Enter the percentage of the combo or main item price that will be used for the calculation of the BC Soda Beverage Tax.

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: From April 1st, 2021, this value needs to be set at 50%.
{% endhint %}

<figure><img src="/files/h6E1TyBRKGxxrqDdhnEQ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

Click Delete to remove this division and return to the list of divisions.

![Button - OK](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-OK\(Consolas\).jpg)

Click OK to save changes and exit.

![Button - Cancel](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Cancel\(consolas\).gif)

Click Cancel to exit without saving.

![Button - Apply](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Apply\(Reg\).gif)

Click Apply to save changes without exiting.

Repeat this process until all your divisions have taxes assigned to them.


# British Columbia Soda Tax

### B.C. Soda Tax Overview

#### Audience

This article is intended for all Maitre'D users, resellers and support technicians, doing business or providing technical support for users in the province of British Columbia (BC), Canada.

***

### Requirements

#### Maitre'D Version:

Maitre'D 7.08.00.340 or later

***

### Overview

Effective April 1, 2021, soda beverages will no longer qualify for the exemption for food products for human consumption. PST will apply to all retail sales of soda beverages at a rate of 7%.

If you sell soda beverages and are not already registered as a PST collector, you must register to collect and remit PST. Ensure your point of sale systems are updated to charge PST on soda beverages effective April 1, 2021.

#### What Are Soda Beverages?

Soda beverages are carbonated or effervescent beverages that have bubbles and fizz and contain any of the following:

* Sugar
* Natural occurring sweeteners
* Added natural sweeteners (such as honey, molasses, maple syrup, fruit juice, stevia, etc.)
* Artificial sweeteners (such as aspartame, sucralose, saccharin, etc.)

Carbonation or effervescence may be either naturally occurring in drinks (as in the case of fermented non-alcoholic beverages, such as kombucha) or injected after the beverage has been manufactured (e.g. with carbon dioxide or nitrogen).

#### Examples of Soda Beverages Include:

* Soft drinks and soda pop
* Sparkling fruit juices
* Carbonated or nitrogenized energy drinks
* Kombucha
* Nitrogenized coffee (if sweetened)
* Sparkling, sweetened water

#### Soda beverages also include:

* Frozen sweetened beverages, such as Slurpees or Frosters, that have been carbonated or have other gases added to them, and
* Sweetened effervescent beverages that have any of the following added to them:

  * frozen desserts, such as ice cream (e.g. ice cream floats)
  * fruit or fruit flavouring
  * candy, chocolate or another type of confection

{% hint style="info" %}
NOTE: The information from this section was taken from Notice 2021-002, issued in February 2021 by British Columbia's Ministry of Finance. The original can be consulted here:

&#x20;

[Provincial Sales Tax (PST) Notice 2021-002](https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/taxes/sales-taxes/publications/notice-2021-002-sellers-soda-beverages.pdf)

&#x20;

Learn more about British Columbia's Provincial Sales Tax (PST):

&#x20;

[B.C. Provincial Sales Tax (PST)](https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/taxes/sales-taxes/pst)

&#x20;

Read the Provincial Sales Tax Act:

&#x20;

[B.C. Provincial Sales Tax Act](https://www.bclaws.gov.bc.ca/civix/document/id/complete/statreg/12035_01)

&#x20;

Specific guidelines for the restaurant and bar industry:

&#x20;

[Bulletin PST 119 - Restaurant and Liquor Sellers](https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/taxes/sales-taxes/publications/pst-119-restaurants-liquor-sellers.pdf)
{% endhint %}

***

### British Columbia Soda Tax Configuration

This article explains the Maitre'D configuration required to comply with British Columbia's Provincial Sales Tax Act.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! This article assumes that your Maitre'D POS system is already configured and fully functional. Use the information from this article to update your existing Maitre'D POS system to the new regulation.
{% endhint %}

***

### Configuration sequence

1. Create / Configure Tax Categories as explained in the [Create Tax Categories ](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/taxes/create-tax-categories)article.
2. Create / Configure Taxes as explained in the[ Create Taxes - New Tax](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/taxes/create-taxes) articles. You may also refer to the tables below for specific settings.
3. Assign taxes to divisions as explained in the [Assign Taxes to Divisions](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/taxes/assign-taxes-to-divisions) article.
4. Assign all sales items that are defined as "Sodas" to taxable divisions.

***

### Suggested Tax Categories for Maitre'D

British Columbia has two tiers of sales taxes. The first tier is managed at the provincial level, which includes the provincial sales taxes and liquor taxes. The second tier is managed at the federal level, which includes the Goods & Services Tax (GST). Therefore, it is suggested to use two Tax Categories for Maitre'D:

* Provincial Taxes
* Federal Tax

***

### Required Taxes in Maitre'D

#### Provincial Taxes:

* Provincial Sales Tax (PST) -  7%&#x20;
* Provincial Sales tax (PST) for liquor - 10%

#### Federal Taxes:

* Goods and Services Tax (GST) - 5%

***

### Detailed Tax Configurations

The following tables list all the options and settings for each tax. Refer to the  [Create Tax Categories ](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/taxes/create-tax-categories)article to learn how to create a new tax, and refer to the tables below for each individual setting.

#### Provincial Sales Tax (PST) - 7%

The provincial Sales Tax at a rate of 7% applies to sodas as explained in the [B.C. Soda Tax Overview](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/taxes/british-columbia-soda-tax) article. However, if you also sell miscellaneous goods, such as clothing, bottle openers and souvenirs (e.g. souvenir glasses or pens with your company name on them), you also need to apply the 7% PST on these items. The PST may be used as an add-on tax or an inclusive tax.

**Maitre'D Tax Settings for 7% PST configured as add-on tax**

| Branch                   | Option / Field name | Configuration    |
| ------------------------ | ------------------- | ---------------- |
| Setup                    | Description         | PST (7%)         |
| Category                 | Provincial Taxes    | Provincial Taxes |
| Fiscal Identification    | 0                   |                  |
| Tax Type                 | UNDEFINED           |                  |
| Fixed Tax                | Fixed Tax           | OFF              |
| Amount                   | $0.00               |                  |
| Rate                     | Rate                | 7.00000          |
| Minimum Taxable          | $0.00               |                  |
| Special Mode Tax         | UNDEFINED           |                  |
| Tax Table                | Use Tax Table       | OFF              |
| Options                  | Inclusive           | OFF              |
| Check Total              | OFF                 |                  |
| Rounding                 | ON                  |                  |
| Gross Method             | OFF                 |                  |
| Separate Printout        | ON                  |                  |
| Tax Before Quantity      | OFF                 |                  |
| BC Soda Beverages Tax    | ON                  |                  |
| Apply Tax On             | Taxes the Tax       | OFF              |
| Taxable Discount         | OFF                 |                  |
| Taxable Service          | OFF                 |                  |
| Tax on Delivery Charges  | OFF                 |                  |
| Tax on Charged Discounts | OFF                 |                  |
| Taxable Gratuity         | OFF                 |                  |

&#x20;

**Maitre'D Tax Settings for 7% PST configured as inclusive tax**

| Branch                   | Option / Field name | Configuration  |
| ------------------------ | ------------------- | -------------- |
| Setup                    | Description         | PST Incl. (7%) |
| Category                 | Provincial Taxes    |                |
| Fiscal Identification    | 0                   |                |
| Tax Type                 | UNDEFINED           |                |
| Fixed Tax                | Fixed Tax           | OFF            |
| Amount                   | $0.00               |                |
| Rate                     | Rate                | 7.00000        |
| Minimum Taxable          | $0.00               |                |
| Special Mode Tax         | UNDEFINED           |                |
| Tax Table                | Use Tax Table       | OFF            |
| Options                  | Inclusive           | ON             |
| Check Total              | OFF                 |                |
| Rounding                 | ON                  |                |
| Gross Method             | OFF                 |                |
| Separate Printout        | ON                  |                |
| Tax Before Quantity      | ON                  |                |
| BC Soda Beverages Tax    | ON                  |                |
| Apply Tax On             | Taxes the Tax       | OFF            |
| Taxable Discount         | OFF                 |                |
| Taxable Service          | OFF                 |                |
| Tax on Delivery Charges  | OFF                 |                |
| Tax on Charged Discounts | OFF                 |                |
| Taxable Gratuity         | OFF                 |                |

&#x20;

#### Provincial Sales Tax (PST) for liquor - 10%

The provincial Sales Tax at a rate of 10% applies to all alcoholic beverages containing more than 1% of alcohol per volume, such as beer, spirits and liqueurs, wine, mixed drinks, etc.

**Settings for 10% PST configured as add-on tax**

| Branch                   | Option / Field name | Configuration    |
| ------------------------ | ------------------- | ---------------- |
| Setup                    | Description         | PST Liquor (10%) |
| Category                 | Provincial Taxes    |                  |
| Fiscal Identification    | 0                   |                  |
| Tax Type                 | UNDEFINED           |                  |
| Fixed Tax                | Fixed Tax           | OFF              |
| Amount                   | $0.00               |                  |
| Rate                     | Rate                | 10.00000         |
| Minimum Taxable          | $0.00               |                  |
| Special Mode Tax         | UNDEFINED           |                  |
| Tax Table                | Use Tax Table       | OFF              |
| Options                  | Inclusive           | OFF              |
| Check Total              | OFF                 |                  |
| Rounding                 | ON                  |                  |
| Gross Method             | OFF                 |                  |
| Separate Printout        | ON                  |                  |
| Tax Before Quantity      | OFF                 |                  |
| BC Soda Beverages Tax    | OFF                 |                  |
| Apply Tax On             | Taxes the Tax       | OFF              |
| Taxable Discount         | OFF                 |                  |
| Taxable Service          | OFF                 |                  |
| Tax on Delivery Charges  | OFF                 |                  |
| Tax on Charged Discounts | OFF                 |                  |
| Taxable Gratuity         | OFF                 |                  |

&#x20;

**Maitre'D Tax Settings for 10% PST configured as inclusive tax**

| Branch                   | Option / Field name | Configuration        |
| ------------------------ | ------------------- | -------------------- |
| Setup                    | Description         | PST Liq. Incl. (10%) |
| Category                 | Provincial Taxes    |                      |
| Fiscal Identification    | 0                   |                      |
| Tax Type                 | UNDEFINED           |                      |
| Fixed Tax                | Fixed Tax           | OFF                  |
| Amount                   | $0.00               |                      |
| Rate                     | Rate                | 10.00000             |
| Minimum Taxable          | $0.00               |                      |
| Special Mode Tax         | UNDEFINED           |                      |
| Tax Table                | Use Tax Table       | OFF                  |
| Options                  | Inclusive           | ON                   |
| Check Total              | OFF                 |                      |
| Rounding                 | ON                  |                      |
| Gross Method             | OFF                 |                      |
| Separate Printout        | ON                  |                      |
| Tax Before Quantity      | ON                  |                      |
| BC Soda Beverages Tax    | OFF                 |                      |
| Apply Tax On             | Taxes the Tax       | OFF                  |
| Taxable Discount         | OFF                 |                      |
| Taxable Service          | OFF                 |                      |
| Tax on Delivery Charges  | OFF                 |                      |
| Tax on Charged Discounts | OFF                 |                      |
| Taxable Gratuity         | OFF                 |                      |

&#x20;

#### Goods and Services Tax (GST) - 5%

The federal Goods and Service Tax (GST) at a rate of 5% applies on all goods and services, including food, beverages, alcohol, clothing, souvenirs, etc. The GST may be used as an add-on tax or an inclusive tax.

&#x20;

**Maitre'D Tax Settings for 5% GST configured as add-on tax**

| Branch                   | Option / Field name | Configuration |
| ------------------------ | ------------------- | ------------- |
| Setup                    | Description         | GST (5%)      |
| Category                 | Federal Tax         |               |
| Fiscal Identification    | 0                   |               |
| Tax Type                 | UNDEFINED           |               |
| Fixed Tax                | Fixed Tax           | OFF           |
| Amount                   | $0.00               |               |
| Rate                     | Rate                | 5.00000       |
| Minimum Taxable          | $0.00               |               |
| Special Mode Tax         | UNDEFINED           |               |
| Tax Table                | Use Tax Table       | OFF           |
| Options                  | Inclusive           | OFF           |
| Check Total              | OFF                 |               |
| Rounding                 | ON                  |               |
| Gross Method             | OFF                 |               |
| Separate Printout        | ON                  |               |
| Tax Before Quantity      | OFF                 |               |
| BC Soda Beverages Tax    | OFF                 |               |
| Apply Tax On             | Taxes the Tax       | OFF           |
| Taxable Discount         | OFF                 |               |
| Taxable Service          | ON                  |               |
| Tax on Delivery Charges  | ON                  |               |
| Tax on Charged Discounts | ON                  |               |
| Taxable Gratuity         | OFF                 |               |

&#x20;

**Maitre'D Tax Settings for 5% GST configured as inclusive tax**

| Branch                   | Option / Field name | Configuration  |
| ------------------------ | ------------------- | -------------- |
| Setup                    | Description         | GST Incl. (5%) |
| Category                 | Federal Tax         |                |
| Fiscal Identification    | 0                   |                |
| Tax Type                 | UNDEFINED           |                |
| Fixed Tax                | Fixed Tax           | OFF            |
| Amount                   | $0.00               |                |
| Rate                     | Rate                | 5.00000        |
| Minimum Taxable          | $0.00               |                |
| Special Mode Tax         | UNDEFINED           |                |
| Tax Table                | Use Tax Table       | OFF            |
| Options                  | Inclusive           | ON             |
| Check Total              | OFF                 |                |
| Rounding                 | ON                  |                |
| Gross Method             | OFF                 |                |
| Separate Printout        | ON                  |                |
| Tax Before Quantity      | ON                  |                |
| BC Soda Beverages Tax    | OFF                 |                |
| Apply Tax On             | Taxes the Tax       | OFF            |
| Taxable Discount         | OFF                 |                |
| Taxable Service          | ON                  |                |
| Tax on Delivery Charges  | ON                  |                |
| Tax on Charged Discounts | ON                  |                |
| Taxable Gratuity         | OFF                 |                |

***

### Division Tax Settings for British Columbia

#### Audience

The settings explained in this article only applies to businesses located in the Canadian province of British Columbia.

#### Aim

The aim of this article is to explain how to setup Maitre'D divisions to comply with the British Columbia Provincial Sales Tax Act. These setings will ensure that sodas are taxed according to [Provincial Sales Tax (PST) Notice 2021-002,](https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/taxes/sales-taxes/publications/notice-2021-002-sellers-soda-beverages.pdf) which came into effect on April 1st 2021. At the same time, this configuration will ensure compliance with all other provisions of the Provincial Sales Tax Act pertaining to the restaurant and bar industry, as defined in [Bulletin PST 119 - Restaurant and Liquor Sellers](https://www2.gov.bc.ca/assets/gov/taxes/sales-taxes/publications/pst-119-restaurants-liquor-sellers.pdf).

***

### Before you begin

Make sure that all required taxes are created and properly configured. See [B.C. Soda Tax Configuration](#british-columbia-soda-tax-configuration).

To learn how to access tax settings for each division and read definitions for each setting, see [Assign Taxes to Divisions](/maitred/maitred-complete-online-documentation/chap-4-point-of-sale-control/taxes/assign-taxes-to-divisions).

***

### Divisions containing soda beverages

For definitions of what is considered a "Soda Beverage", see [B.C. Soda Tax Overview](#b.c.-soda-tax-overview).

The divisions used for sodas are taxable by both the GST (5%) and PST (7%). Here are the required settings:

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/BCTax/SoftDrinkDiv.png)

**Tax #1**

Select GST (5%) from the drop-down list.

**Tax #2**

Select PST (7%) from the drop-down list.

**BC Soda Beverages Tax**

This section becomes available because the BC Soda Beverage Tax option is enabled in the PST (7%) tax settings.

**Maximum Amount**

Set this value to $3.00.

**Maximum Percentage**

Set this value to 50.

***

### Divisions containing alcoholic beverages

The divisions used for alcohol products are taxable by both the GST (5%) and PST Liquor (10%). Here are the required settings:

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/BCTax/LiquorDiv.png)

**Tax #1**

Select GST (5%) from the drop-down list.

**Tax #2**

Select PST Liquor (10%) from the drop-down list.

**BC Soda Beverages Tax**

This section is not available because the BC Soda Beverage Tax option is disabled in both the PST Liquor (10%) and GST (5%) tax settings.

**Maximum Amount**

Unavailable.

**Maximum Percentage**

Unavailable.

***

### Divisions containing other taxable items

The divisions used for non-food items are taxable by both the GST (5%) and PST (7%). Here are the required settings:

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/BCTax/MerchDiv.png)

**Tax #1**

Select GST (5%) from the drop-down list.

**Tax #2**

Select PST (7%) from the drop-down list.

**BC Soda Beverages Tax**

This section becomes available because the BC Soda Beverage Tax option is enabled in the PST (7%) tax settings. However, these settings must be left at zero for "non-soda" divisions.

**Maximum Amount**

Set this value to $0.00.

**Maximum Percentage**

Set this value to 0.

***

### Divisions containing food or other non-PST-taxable items

The divisions containing food items are taxable only by the GST (5%). Here are the required settings:

![](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Taxes/BCTax/FoodDiv.png)

**Tax #1**

Select GST (5%) from the drop-down list.

**Tax #2**

Select *Undefined* from the drop-down list.

**BC Soda Beverages Tax**

This section is not available because the BC Soda Beverage Tax option is disabled in the GST (5%) tax settings.

**Maximum Amount**

Unavailable.

**Maximum Percentage**

Unavailable.

***

### Examples of PST application on sodas

This article will cover some common scenarios that can be encountered when the PST is applied to soda beverages in British Columbia, and a brief overview of the required configuration.

***

### British Columbia "Soda Tax" recap

Here is a quick recap of British Columbia's Provincial Sales Tax (PST) rules which applies to soda beverages. For complete and up-to-date documentation regarding taxes, please consult the official British Columbia government site at <https://www2.gov.bc.ca/gov/content/taxes/sales-taxes>.

* PST applies to all retail sales of soda beverages at a rate of 7%.
* If you offer the beverage for sale without the food or other good, you charge PST on the lesser of:
  * the ordinary purchase price of that beverage, and;
  * the total purchase price of the other good and beverage together.

Or

* If you offer the beverage for sale only with the food or other good, the lesser of:
  * 50% of the total purchase price of the food or other good and beverage together, and;
  * $3

Also, don't forget that almost all items sold in restaurants, including soft drinks, are also taxable by the federal Goods and Services Tax (GST) at a rate of 5%.

{% hint style="warning" %}
IMPORTANT! While the new regulations are often referred to as "B.C. Soda Tax", it is important to understand that the government of British Columbia did not create a new tax specifically for sodas. Instead, the updated law simply extends the reach of the existing Provincial Sales Tax to soda beverages.

&#x20;

For your POS system, this means that you should not have a separate tax for sodas. You should use the PST at a rate of 7%.
{% endhint %}

***

### Example #1

You offer an all-you-can-eat buffet with access to a soda fountain for $30.00. Access to the soda fountain is not sold separately and it is not listed on the menu, therefore it does not have its own price. The $3.00 / 50% rule applies: Since $3.00 is lesser than 50% of $30.00 ($15.00), the PST will be calculated on $3.00.

#### Configuration for Example #1

* Configure a revenue item called "Buffet - Adult" with a price of $30.00. Make this item part of a food division.
* Configure a free item called "Soda Fountain". Make this item part of a Soda/Soft Drink division.
* Link the Buffet - Adult item to the Soda Fountain item through a Weight Modifier and a variable list.

***

### Example #2

You offer an all-you-can-eat buffet for $28.00. You offer access to a soda fountain for an additional $2.00. Because access to the soda fountain is listed separately on the menu, the PST is calculated on the sale price of $2.00 for this item.

#### Configuration for Example #2

* Configure a Revenue item called "Buffet - Adult" with a price of $28.00. Make this item part of a food division.
* Configure a Modifier item called "Soda Fountain" with a price of $2.00. Make this item part of a Soda/Soft Drink division.
* Configure a Modifier item called "Water" with a price of $0.00. Make this item part of a "non-soda beverages" division.
* Link the Buffet - Adult item to the Soda Fountain and water items through a Weight Modifier and a variable list.
* This will allow the server to select between "Soda Fountain" (pst-taxable) and "Water" (non-pst-taxable).

***

### Example #3

You sell a hot-dog and large soda combo for $5.00. The soda is not listed on the menu and not sold on its own. The $3.00 / 50% rule applies: Because 50% of $5.00 ($2.50) is lesser than $3.00, the PST will be calculated on $2.50.

#### Configuration for Example #3

* Configure a revenue item called "*Hot-Dog Combo*" with a price of $5.00. Make this item part of a food division.
* Configure a free item called "*Soda - Included*". Make this item part of a Soda/Soft Drink division.
* Link the *Hot-Dog Combo* item to the Soda - Included item through a Weight Modifier and a variable list.

***

### Example #4

You sell a hot-dog and large soda combo for $5.00. The Hot-Dog on its own is $3.25 and the drink on its own is $2.25, which are both listed on the menu. In this instance, the PST will be calculated on the ordinary sale price of the soda, which is $2.25.

#### Configuration for Example #4

* Configure a revenue item called "*Hot-Dog Combo*" with a price of $5.00. Make this item part of a food division and enable the Main Combo Item option for this item.
* Configure a revenue item called "*Hot-Dog*" with a price of $3.25. Make this item part of a food division.
* Configure a revenue item called "Large Soda" with a price of $2.25. Make this item part of a Soda/Soft Drink division.
* Create and configure a combo meal which will include the hot-dog and a soft drink.
* To order this combo, you can rely on combo detection or create variable lists and Weighted Modifiers.

***

### Example #5

You sell a hot-dog and large soda combo for $5.00. The Hot-Dog on its own is $3.25 and the drink is $2.25, which are both listed on the menu. You have a special promotion which gives 75% off hot-dog combos that day, which brings the total price of the combo down to $1.25. In this instance, the PST will be calculated on the total price of the combo, which is now $1.25.

#### Configuration for Example #5

* Use the same configuration as Example #4.
* Create a 75% Off promotion which will apply on the Hot-Dog combo.


# Managing Sales Systems

### Division Categories

#### Coming Soon

Check back soon for updated contents.

***

### Revenues Center and Modes

#### Coming Soon

Check back soon for updated contents.

***

### Item Classes

#### Coming Soon

Check back soon for updated contents.

***

### Variable Lists

#### Coming Soon

Check back soon for updated contents.

***

### Weigthed Modifiers

#### Coming Soon

Check back soon for updated contents.


# Screens

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-cover data-type="files"></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Maitre'D Screens</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/jrDRqPws5lof2FBIjt4v">/pages/jrDRqPws5lof2FBIjt4v</a></td></tr><tr><td>Preferential Screen Editor</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/zM9WTgWrTd4lnrfea9YD">/pages/zM9WTgWrTd4lnrfea9YD</a></td></tr><tr><td>Screen Layout</td><td></td><td><a href="/pages/w7emRu2hQwOJBO6F6XTp">/pages/w7emRu2hQwOJBO6F6XTp</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Maitre'D Screens

Maitre'D screens are the interface that allows POS users to interact with the Maitre'D POS system. They allow ordering of sales items and perform all the operations required to run a successful restaurant business. Different screens can be assigned to each employee based on their functions and responsibilities in the restaurant, and screens can change automatically based on modes and revenue centers.

***

### Understanding the POS Workstation Screen

The key to managing POS workstation screens is to understand the different components that make up the screen. The POS workstation is divided into separate components that are configured independently, allowing a great degree of customization to the restaurant.

#### Screen Components

The Maitre'D POS screen has 3 main components:

* The Main Screen Layout area.
* The Preferential Screen area.
* The Display area.

#### Main Screen Layout

The Main Screen Layout consists of fixed button rows located at the top and bottom of the POS screen. Typically, restaurants will use these fixed buttons for common commands such as Send, Print Check, Close, quick payment keys, navigation keys, etc. Direct shortcuts to frequently used Preferential Screens or variable lists can also be created. It is also very common to have different layouts based on employee functions or revenue centers. For instance, a manager may have a more comprehensive layout with more commands commands compared to a regular server. Also, dining room servers may have a different layout than bartenders or cashiers, etc.

#### Preferential Screen

This is the area where most sales items will be displayed. Multiple screens can be created. Each screen will typically contain items that are related to each other. Navigation keys can be added to the screen layout to cycle through all available preferential screens. Clever preferential screen designs can also allow navigation from the preferential screens directly. This area will also display variable lists, item classes and weighted modifiers.

#### Screen Layout / Preferential Screen shared space

In the bottom part of the Screen Layout, there is a space that can be shared with the Preferential Screen, as illustrated by the graphic above. The bottom part of the screen layout allows up to 3 rows of buttons. If the third row of buttons is not used, the resulting free space will automatically be assigned to the preferential screen area. If the third row is used, the preferential screen area will simply squeeze in the smaller space, making every button slightly smaller.

#### Display

The display area is where employees can see table and customer information, ordered items, running total and tax amounts. By default, the display area is located on the left-hand side of the screen, as the majority of the population is right-handed. This can be reversed for left-handed employees by enabling the Left handed option in Point of Sale Control > Employees > Employees... > \[Employee\_Name] > POS Operation > Option.

***

### Examples

#### Screen components with the Legacy POS User Interface

<figure><img src="/files/4IrflbtIjB6OSUMUyjiZ" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

#### &#x20;Screen components with the Advanced POS User Interface

<figure><img src="/files/yt9kZtkglNID8fh23Aga" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>


# Preferential Screens

<table data-view="cards"><thead><tr><th></th><th data-hidden data-card-target data-type="content-ref"></th></tr></thead><tbody><tr><td>Preferential Screen Setup</td><td><a href="/pages/r5AGjTUzTHF0KA89wLrf">/pages/r5AGjTUzTHF0KA89wLrf</a></td></tr><tr><td>Advanced user Interface</td><td><a href="/pages/hk4ipyKaDdawTWI0HO34">/pages/hk4ipyKaDdawTWI0HO34</a></td></tr><tr><td>Button Properties</td><td><a href="/pages/FdDrazlz3wDI0ks7NSG4">/pages/FdDrazlz3wDI0ks7NSG4</a></td></tr><tr><td>Button Command List</td><td><a href="/pages/RTqylJM2ASQ9XowfS2io">/pages/RTqylJM2ASQ9XowfS2io</a></td></tr></tbody></table>


# Preferential Screen Setup

Preferential Screens are created to display a logical grouping of sales items. For example, a preferential screen can be created to display the selection of soft drinks available or a list of desserts. Preferential screens can also be modified on the fly.

Typically, a restaurant will have several preferential screens, which will be displayed depending on the time of day or the employee role. Bartenders will have access to different preferential screens than dining room servers. This gives restaurants a great amount of flexibility when customizing their POS workstation screens.

***

### Access Preferential Screen Setup

1. Logon to the Maitre’D Back-Office with appropriate credentials. (Distributor or System Owner)

<figure><img src="/files/3GRhiFmdgWtqGrkdyfeA" alt=""><figcaption></figcaption></figure>

![Maitre'D Logon Screen](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/MD_LogonScreen.gif)

2. Start the Point of Sale Control module.

![Back-Office Icon - Point of Sale Control](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/ICON_PointSales.svg)

3. Click on the Screens menu and select Preferential Screen setup...

![Screens Menu - Preferential Screen Setup...](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Screens/PrefScreens/01-ScreensMenu-PrefScreens.png)

4. The list of available Preferential Screens is displayed.

![Preferential Screens List](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Screens/PrefScreens/02-List-PrefScreens.png)

![Button - Modify](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Modify.jpg)

Select an existing preferential screen and click the Modify button to edit its properties.

![Button - Add](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Add.jpg)

Click the Add button to create a new preferential screen from scratch.

![Button - Close](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/MaitreDCommon/Buttons/MDButton-Close.jpg)

Click the Close button to exit the list and return to the Point of Sale Control module.

5. The Preferential Screen Editor will appear.

#### Preferential Screen Editor - Advanced POS UI

![Preferential Screen Editor - Advanced POS UI](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Screens/PrefScreens/03-PrefScreenEditor-AdvancedUI.png)

#### Preferential Screen Editor - Legacy POS UI

![Preferential Screen Editor - Legacy POS UI](https://documentation.payfacto.com/POS/MaitreD/Fulldoc/assets/images/POSControl/Screens/PrefScreens/04-PrefScreenEditor-LegacyUI.png)




---

[Next Page](/llms-full.txt/1)

